201
OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET Keep With Vehicle At All Times. Contains Important Information On Safety, Operation & Maintenance. ENG. Part No. 99011M76M03-74E March, 2015 O R I H S T E U D A S E E C R I V

OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    6

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

99011M76M

02-74E

CO

DE

02/0

3/2

015

/500

0

Service Division

MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITEDPalam Gurgaon Road, Gurgaon - 122 015 (Haryana)

www.marutisuzuki.com

PEACE OF MIND1800 102 1800

India's No. 1 Car Exchange Programme

OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLETKeep With Vehicle At All Times.Contains Important InformationOn Safety, Operation & Maintenance.

ENG.Part No. 99011M76M02-74EMarch, 2015

ORIH ST E

U D

A

S EE CR IV

99011M76M

03-74E

CO

DE

02

/03

/20

15

/50

00

Service Division

MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITEDPalam Gurgaon Road, Gurgaon - 122 015 (Haryana)

www.marutisuzuki.com

PEACE OF MIND1800 102 1800

India's No. 1 Car Exchange Programme

OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLETKeep With Vehicle At All Times.Contains Important InformationOn Safety, Operation & Maintenance.

ENG.Part No. 99011M76M03-74EMarch, 2015

ORIH ST E

U D

A

S EE CR IV

Page 2: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

This Owner’s manual & service booklet applies to CELERIO modelsproduced by MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED.

c COPYRIGHT MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED 2015

Note : The illustrated model is one of the CELERIO seriesAccessories shown in the picture are not part of standard equipment

Prepared by

MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED

Service DivisionMarch, 2015

Part No. 99011M76M02-74EPrinted in India

#For round-the-clock on-road assistance, call Maruti On-road Service at 1800 102 1800#No STD code to be prefixed.

This Owner’s manual & service booklet applies to CELERIO modelsproduced by MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED.

c COPYRIGHT MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED 2015

Note : The illustrated model is one of the CELERIO seriesAccessories shown in the picture are not part of standard equipment

Prepared by

MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED

Service DivisionMarch, 2015

Part No. 99011M76M03-74EPrinted in India

#For round-the-clock on-road assistance, call Maruti On-road Service at 1800 102 1800#No STD code to be prefixed.

Page 3: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

Cel

erio

Cel

erio

Cel

erio

Dear Sir/Madam,

Thank you for choosing a Maruti Suzuki vehicle.

I hope our dealership team took good care while delivering the vehicle to you.

Your vehicle is equipped with state-of-the-art technologies. To get the best performance from your vehicle (and ensure it is trouble-free), kindly get your vehicle serviced periodically, as per the maintenance schedule in your Owner's Manual. Please make sure the service is done at a Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results.

For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized dealers for assistance. Kindly appreciate that any tampering of wiring harness to fit accessories may cause the vehicle to malfunction.

Thank you once again for choosing a Maruti Suzuki vehicle.

I wish you many years of safe and happy driving.

Pankaj Narula

MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITEDPalam Gurgaon Road, Gurgaon-122015www.marutisuzuki.com

Executive Director (Service)

Yours sincerely

(Pankaj Narula)

Page 4: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

Vehicle may , meet with an or due to

1. Installation of - High wattage bulbs - Non genuine lamps / horns- Modified suspension / wheels- Non genuine parts / accessories etc.

2. Retrofitment of LPG / CNG fuel systems/kits.

3. Usage of domestic LPG.

4. Short circuiting due to tampering of wiring harness.

CAUTION: DO NOT STORE OR CARRY INFLAMMABLE MATERIALS IN THE VEHICLE.

break-downaccident catch fire

Avoid driving into or starting the vehicle in a heavily water logged area. Vehicle may break-down or engine may fail due to

1. Water entry into the engine.

2. Short circuiting of the electrical systems.

If the vehicle is stuck in deep water, start / crank the vehicle until the level of water drops below the level of exhaust pipe.

NOTE:IF THE VEHICLE IS SUBMERGED IN WATER, REPORT TO THE NEAREST AUTHORIZED WORKSHOP.

do not

“WARNING”

Page 5: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized
Page 6: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized
Page 7: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized
Page 8: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized
Page 9: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized
Page 10: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized
Page 11: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized
Page 12: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

76MH1-74E

1

TABLE OF CONTENTS FUEL RECOMMENDATION 1

BEFORE DRIVING 2

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE 3

DRIVING TIPS 4

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 5

VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING 6

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 7

EMERGENCY SERVICE 8

APPEARANCE CARE 9

GENERAL INFORMATION 10

SPECIFICATIONS 11

SERVICE NETWORK 12

76MH1-74E

Page 13: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

0-1

76MH1-74E

FOREWORDThis manual is an essential part of yourvehicle and should remain with the vehiclewhen resold or otherwise transferred to anew owner or operator. Please read thismanual carefully before operating yournew MARUTI SUZUKI and review themanual from time to time. It containsimportant information on safety, operationand maintenance. You are invited to availthe three Free Inspection Services asdescribed in the manual. Three freeinspection coupons are attached to thismanual. Please show this manual to yourdealer while you take your MARUTISUZUKI for any Service.To prolong the life of your vehicle andreduce maintenance cost, the periodicmaintenance must be carried out accord-ing to “PERIODIC MAINTENANCESCHEDULE” described in “INSPECTIONAND MAINTENANCE” section of this man-ual. It is essential for preventing troubleand accidents to ensure your satisfactionand safety.Daily inspection and care as per “DAILYINSPECTION CHECKLIST” described inthe “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE”section of this manual is essential for pro-longing the life of the vehicle and for safedriving.

MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED believesin conservation and protection of Earth’snatural resources.To that end, we encourage every vehicleowner to recycle, trade-in or properly dis-pose of, as appropriate, used Engine Oil,coolant and other fluids, batteries andtyres etc.

MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED

All information in this manual is basedon the latest product information avail-able at the time of publication. Due toimprovements or other changes, theremay be discrepancies between informa-tion in this manual and your vehicle.MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITEDreserves the right to make productionchanges at any time, without notice andwithout incurring any obligation tomake the same or similar changes tovehicles previously built or sold.

This vehicle may not comply with stan-dards or regulations of other countries.Before attempting to register this vehi-cle in any other country, check all appli-cable regulations and make any neces-sary modifications.

2

Page 14: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

0-2

76MH1-74E

55KS0-74E

IMPORTANTWARNING/ CAUTION/NOTICE/

NOTEPlease read this manual and follow itsinstructions carefully. To emphasize spe-cial information, the symbol and thewords WARNING, CAUTION, NOTICEand NOTE have special meanings. Payparticular attention to messages high-lighted by these signal words:

NOTE:Indicates special information to makemaintenance easier or instructions clearer.

75F135

The circle with a slash in this manualmeans “Don’t do this” or “Don’t let this hap-pen”.

MODIFICATION WARNING

WARNINGIndicates a potential hazard thatcould result in death or seriousinjury.

CAUTIONIndicates a potential hazard thatcould result in minor or moderateinjury.

NOTICEIndicates a potential hazard thatcould result in vehicle damage.

WARNINGDo not modify your vehicle. Modifica-tion could adversely affect safety,handling, performance, or durabilityand may violate governmental regula-tions. In addition, damage or perfor-mance problems resulting frommodification may not be coveredunder warranty.

NOTICEImproper installation of mobile com-munication equipment such as cellu-lar telephones or CB (Citizen’s Band)radios may cause electronic interfer-ence with your vehicle’s ignition sys-tem, resulting in vehicle performanceproblems. Consult your MARUTISUZUKI dealer for advice on install-ing such mobile communicationequipment.

WARNINGSevere damage may be caused bythe use of either poor quality fueland/or lubricants not recommendedby MARUTI SUZUKI.

3

Page 15: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

0-3

76MH1-74E

VEHICLE DETAILS

MODEL CHASSIS NO. ENGINE NO. KEY NO. DATE OFDELIVERY

ODOMETERREADING (KM)

BATTERY

MAKE SR.NO.BATCH CODE

OWNER’S NAME & ADDRESS ________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________TEL.NO. ____________________________

ADRESS/STAMP OF SELLING DEALER SELLING DEALER CODE

SHOWROOM

WORKSHOP IMPORTANT INFORMATION TO CUSTOMER

Dear Customer,

For any assistance with regard to our product, please contactGeneral Manager/Works Manager at any of our Dealer or Autho-rised Service Station. For additional enquiry you may contact ourRegional Office or Service Department. The Addresses andPhone nos. are given in Service Network section of this Manual.

4

Page 16: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

0-4

76MH1-74E

55KS0-74E

F: .... FREE SERVICE, P:.... PAID SERVICE, W:.... WARRANTY JOB, A:.... ACCIDENTAL JOB

DATE OFSERVICE

KIND OFSERVICE

MILEAGE(KM)

DESCRIPTION OF JOB NAME OF SERVICING DEALER/MASS

JOB CARD NO. MECHANICSSIGNATURE

5

MAINTENANCE SERVICE RECORD

Page 17: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

0-5

76MH1-74E

WARRANTY POLICY

Maruti Suzuki India Limited (hereinafter called “Maruti Suzuki”),warrants that each new Maruti Suzuki vehicle distributed in Indiaby Maruti Suzuki and sold by an authorised Maruti Suzuki dealerwill be free, under normal use and service, from any defects inmaterial and workmanship at the time of manufacture SUBJECTTO THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS:

(1) Qualification:To qualify for this warranty:

(a) The Maruti Suzuki vehicle must be delivered by MarutiSuzuki authorised dealer and set-up, serviced by MarutiSuzuki authorised dealer / service station.

(b) The warranty registration card in respect of each vehiclemust be completed by the dealer at the time of delivery ofthe vehicle and dealer should retain the same.

(2) Term:The term of the warranty shall be twenty-four (24) months or40,000 kilometers (whichever occurs first) from the date ofdelivery to the first owner.

(3) Maruti Suzuki Warranty Obligation:If any defect(s) should be found in a Maruti Suzuki vehicle withinthe term stipulated above, Maruti Suzuki’s only obligation is torepair or replace at its sole discretion any part shown to be defec-tive, with a new part or the equivalent at no cost to the owner forparts or labour, when Maruti Suzuki acknowledges that such adefect is attributable to faulty material or workmanship at the timeof manufacture. The owner is responsible for any repair or replace-ments which are not covered by this warranty.

(4) Limitation:This warranty shall not apply to:1) Normal maintenance service required other than the three

free services, including without limitation, oil and fluidchanges, headlight aiming, fastener retightening, wheel bal-ancing, wheel alignment and tyre rotation, cleaning of injec-tors, adjustments of carburettor, ignition timing, clutch andvalve clearance.

2) The replacement of normal wear parts including without lim-itation, bulbs, tyres and tubes, spark plugs, belts, hoses, fil-ters, wiper blades, brushes, contact points, fuses, clutch disc,brake shoes, brake pads, cable and all rubber parts (exceptoil seal and glass run).

3) Any vehicle which has been used for competition or racing.4) Any repairs or replacement required as a result of accidents

or collision.5) Any defects caused by misuse, negligence, abnormal use or

insufficient care.6) Any vehicle which has been modified or altered, including

without limitation, the installation of performance accesso-ries.

7) Any vehicle on which parts or accessories not approved byMaruti Suzuki have been used.

8) Any vehicle which has not been operated in accordance withthe operating instructions in the Maruti Suzuki Owner’s Man-ual.

9) Any vehicle which has not received, during the warranty term,the service inspections prescribed in the Maruti SuzukiOwner’s Manual.

10) Any vehicle which has been assembled, disassembled,adjusted or repaired by other than an Maruti Suzuki autho-rised dealer/service station.

6

Page 18: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

0-6

76MH1-74E

55KS0-74E

11) Any vehicle which has been used for purposes other thanwhat it was designed for.

12) Any damage or deterioration caused by industrial pollutionand bird droppings.

13) Insignificant defects which do not affect the function of thevehicle including without limitation, sound, vibration and fluidseep.

14) Any natural wear and tear including without limitation, agingetc.

15) Installation and usage of domestic LPG gas/LPG Cylinder.16) V-belts, hoses and gas leaks (For Maruti Suzuki AC vehicle).17) Any vehicle retrofitted with LPG/CNG kits.

(5) Extent of Warranty:This warranty is the entire written warranty given by Maruti Suzukifor Maruti Suzuki vehicles and no dealer or its or his agent oremployee is authorised to extend or enlarge this warranty and nodealer or its or his agent or employee is authorised to make anyoral warranty on Maruti Suzuki’s behalf.Maruti Suzuki reserves the right to add any improvements orchange the design of any model at any time with no obligation tomake the same changes on units previously sold.

(6) Warranty Service:To obtain warranty service, the complete vehicle must be pre-sented at the owner’s expenses to any authorised Maruti Suzukidealer.

(7) Owner’s Warranty ResponsibIlities:It is responsibility of each owner to:

– Make certain that the warranty registration/PDl card wascompleted at the time of delivery of the vehicle;

– Have performed, at his own expenses, by an Maruti Suzukiauthorised dealer/service station all the service inspectionsspecified in the Maruti Suzuki “Owner’s Manual and ServiceBooklet and maintain adequate proof that such serviceinspections have been performed.

– Make certain that the Maruti Suzuki authorised dealer/ser-vice station performing the service inspection has certifiedthe work on the “Maintenance Service Record” page in the“Owner’s Manual and Service Booklet and

– Present the Maruti Suzuki “Owner’s Manual and ServiceBooklet to the authorised Maruti Suzuki dealer wheneverrequesting service inspections or warranty service.

If the “Owner’s Manual and Service Booklet should be lost ordestroyed the owner should consult the authorised Maruti Suzukidealer from whom the vehicle was purchased for instructions con-cerning replacement of the “Owner’s Manual and Service Booklet.

(8) Disclaimer of Consequential Damage:Maruti Suzuki assumes no responsibility for loss of vehicle, loss oftime, inconvenience or any other indirect incidental or consequen-tial damage resulting from the vehicle not being available to theowner because of any defect covered by this warranty.

(9) Change of OwnerEven if ownership of the vehicle changes, the remaining warrantyperiod is effective for the new owner.

7

Page 19: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

0-7

76MH1-74E

EMISSION WARRANTY POLICY

Maruti Suzuki offers the Emission Warranty on all Maruti Suzukivehicles (apart from the Regular Warranty and will run parallel tothe regular product warranty) only in four metropolitan cities (NewDelhi, Kolkata, Mumbai and Chennai) with effect from July 1st,2001.

Terms:The Emission Warranty will be applicable for 80,000 kms or 3years (Whichever comes earlier) from the date of delivery to thefirst owner. The remaining warranty terms will be valid in case ofany change in ownership provided the production of all valid docu-ments.

Conditions:1. Under Emission Waranty, Warranty claims will be admitted for

a prima facie examination, in case vehicle fails to meet theEmission Standard as specified in sub rule (2) of rule no. 115of Central Motor Vehicles Rules (CMVR), 1989.

2. The warranty claims will only be accepted after examinationcarried out by Maruti Suzuki or it’s dealer which leads to firmconclusions that thea) Original settings have not been tempered in any case.b) Part (as given in Annexure - A) has a manufacturing defect.c) Vehicle is unable to meet the Emission Standards (as given

in 1.), inspite of the vehicle having been maintained andused in accordance with the instructions as specified inOwner’s Manual and Service Booklet and the used fuel anddifferent oils (Engine oil, Transmission oil, Brake oil etc.) arealso as per specification.

3. The method of examination for deciding the warranty of theparts will be at the sole discretion of Maruti Suzuki and it’sdealer and results of the examination will be final and binding.If after examination, the warrantable condition is not estab-lished, Maruti Suzuki and it’s dealer has the right to charge all,or part of the cost of such examination.

4. Under Emission Warranty, the parts (as given in Annexure - A)will be changed free of cost, but the consumables will becharged as per actual.

5. If the part covered under Emission Warranty or the associatedparts, are not independently replaceable, on account of thesebeing integral parts of a complete assembly, Maruti Suzuki andit’s dealer will have the sole discretion to replace either theentire assembly or by using some of the parts of the systemthrough suitable repairs or modifications.

6. Any consequential repairs or replacement of parts which maybe found necessary to establish compliance of Emission War-ranty, will not be considered under warranty, unless the same isunder product warranty. The consumable will be charged asper actual under such repair or replacement.

7. Maruti Suzuki will not be responsible for the cost of transporta-tion of the vehicle to the nearest Maruti Suzuki dealer work-shop or any loss due to non-availability of the vehicle duringthe period of lodging of a warranty claim and examination and/or repair by Maruti Suzuki dealer.

8. Maruti Suzuki will not be responsible for any penalty that maybe charged by statutory authorities on account of failure tocomply with the EMISSION STANDARDS.

9. Emission Waranty will not be affected on the change of owner,provided all the documents are available.

8

Page 20: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

0-8

76MH1-74E

55KS0-74E

10.All maintenance actions (as specified in the Owner’s Manualand Service Booklet) need to be followed and recorded in themanual for emission warranty.

11.The customer needs to produce the PUC (Pollution UnderControl) certificate valid for the period preceeding the testduring which the failure is discovered. The receipts (for themaintenance of the vehicle as per specification in Owner’sManual and Service Booklet from the date of original purchaseof the vehicle) will also be required.

Conditions under which the Emission Warranty is notAPPLICABLE1. In the absence of valid PUC certificate.2. Vehicle not serviced from Maruti Suzuki authorised workshop

as per the schedule specified in the Owner’s Manual.3. Vehicle subjected to abnormal use (accident, motor race, ral-

lies or for the purpose of establishing the records etc).4. Use of non MGP (Maruti Geniune Part).5. Vehicle tampered in an unauthorised manner.6. Tampering with odometer so that the actual kilometer reading

can not be read.7. Use of adulterated fuel and/or unspecified oils (Engine oil,

Transmission oil and Brake oil etc).

Annexure - AList of parts covered under Emission Warranty1. Fuel Injection Assembly, Pressure Regulator, Throttle Body

Assembly.2. Electronic Control Module (ECM).3. Intake Manifold.4. EGR valve.5. Distributor and internal parts.6. Ignition Coil.7. Canister Assembly.8. Vapour Liquid Seperator.9. Fuel Tank and Filler Cap.10. PCV (Positive Crankcase Ventilation) Valve.11. Oil Filler Cap.12. Catalytic Convertor.13. Exhaust Manifold.14. All Fuel Injection System related SENSORS.15. High Pressure Fuel Pump.16. Glow Plug.17. Glow Plug Controller.

9

Page 21: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

1-1

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

76MH1-74E

10

Fuel RecommendationPetrol EngineYou must use unleaded petrol with anoctane number (RON) of 91 or higher.

Petrol/Ethanol blendsBlends of unleaded petrol and ethanol(grain alcohol), also known as gasohol, arecommercially available in some areas.Blends of this type may be used in yourvehicle if they are no more than 10% etha-nol. Make sure this petrol-ethanol blendhas octane ratings no lower than thoserecommended for petrol.

Petrol/Methanol blendsBlends of unleaded petrol and methanol(wood alcohol) are also commercially avail-able in some areas. DO NOT USE fuelscontaining more than 5% methanol underany circumstances. Fuel system damageor vehicle performance problems resultingfrom the use of such fuels are not theresponsibility of MARUTI SUZUKI and maynot be covered under the New VehicleWarranty.Fuels containing 5% or less methanol maybe suitable for use in your vehicle if theycontain cosolvents and corrosion inhibi-tors.

NOTE:If you are not satisfied with the driveabilityor fuel economy of your vehicle when youare using a petrol/alcohol blend, youshould switch back to unleaded petrol con-taining no alcohol.

Diesel EngineThe diesel fuel should be with CetaneNumber (CN) higher than 51 and sulfurcontent less than 350 ppm (parts per mil-lion). MARUTI SUZUKI recommends touse the diesel fuel conformable to EN590.Do not use marine diesel fuel, heating oilsand so forth.NOTICE

The fuel tank has an air space toallow for fuel expansion in hotweather. If you continue to add fuelafter the filler nozzle has automati-cally shut off or an initial blowbackoccurs, the air chamber will becomefull. Exposure to heat when fullyfuelled in this manner will result inleakage due to fuel expansion. Toprevent such fuel leakage, stop fillingafter the filler nozzle has automati-cally shut off, or when using an alter-native non-automatic system, initialvent blowback occurs.

NOTICEBe careful not to spill fuel containingalcohol while refueling. If fuel isspilled on the vehicle body, wipe it upimmediately. Fuels containing alco-hol can cause paint damage, which isnot covered under the New VehicleLimited Warranty.

NOTICEThe fuel tank has an air space toallow for fuel expansion in hotweather. If you continue to add fuelafter the filler nozzle has automati-cally shut off or an initial blow backoccurs, the air chamber will becomefull. Exposure to heat when fullyfuelled in this manner will result inleakage due to fuel expansion. Toprevent such fuel leakage, stop fillingafter the filler nozzle has automati-cally shut off, or when using an alter-native non-automatic system, initialvent blowback occurs.

NOTICEBe careful not to spill fuel containingalcohol while refueling. If fuel isspilled on the vehicle body, wipe it upimmediately. Fuels containing alco-hol can cause paint damage, which isnot covered under the New VehicleLimited Warranty.

76MH1-74E

Page 22: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

76MH1-74E

BEFORE DRIVING Keys ...................................................................................... 2-1Door Locks .......................................................................... 2-2Keyless Entry System Transmitter (if equipped) ............. 2-5Security System (if equipped) ............................................ 2-7Windows .............................................................................. 2-10Mirrors .................................................................................. 2-11Front Seats .......................................................................... 2-13Rear Seats ............................................................................ 2-13Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems ........................... 2-15Supplemental Restraint System (air bags) (if equipped) ......................................................................... 2-23Instrument Cluster .............................................................. 2-28Speedometer ....................................................................... 2-29Tachometer (if equipped) ................................................... 2-29Brightness Control .............................................................. 2-29Information Display ............................................................. 2-30Fuel Gauge ........................................................................... 2-31Warning and Indicator Lights ............................................ 2-37Lighting Control Lever ........................................................ 2-42Front Fog Light Switch (if equipped) ................................ 2-43Headlight Leveling Switch .................................................. 2-43Turn Signal Control Lever .................................................. 2-44Hazard Warning Switch ...................................................... 2-45Windshield Wiper and Washer Lever ................................ 2-45Tilt Steering Lock Lever (if equipped) ............................... 2-47Horn ...................................................................................... 2-47Heated Rear Window Switch (if equipped) ....................... 2-47

11

76MH1-74E

Page 23: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-1

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Keys

51KM024

Your vehicle comes with a pair of identicalkeys. Keep the spare key in a safe place.One key can open all of the locks on thevehicle.

The key identification number is stampedon a metal tag provided with the keys or onthe keys. Keep the tag (if equipped) in asafe place. If you lose your keys, you willneed this number to have new keys made.Write the number below for your future ref-erence.

Immobilizer SystemThis system is designed to help preventvehicle theft by electronically disabling theengine starting system.The engine can be started only with yourvehicle’s original immobilizer ignition keywhich has an electronic identification codeprogrammed into it. The key communicatesthe identification code to the vehicle whenthe ignition switch is turned to the “ON”position. If you need to make spare keys,see your MARUTI SUZUKI dealer. Thevehicle must be programmed with the cor-rect identification code for the spare keys. Akey made by an ordinary locksmith will notwork.

80JM122

If the immobilizer system light blinks whenthe ignition switch is in the “ON” position,the engine will not start.

NOTE:• If this light blinks, turn the ignition switch

to the “LOCK” position, then turn it backto the “ON” position.

• If the light still blinks with the ignitionswitch turned to the “ON” position, theremay be something wrong with your key

or with the immobilizer system. Ask yourMARUTI SUZUKI dealer to inspect thesystem.

NOTE:• If you lose your immobilizer ignition key,

see your MARUTI SUZUKI dealer assoon as possible to have the lost onedeactivated, then have the new keymade by them.

• If you own other vehicles with immobi-lizer keys, keep those keys away fromthe ignition switch when using your vehi-cle, or the engine may not be startedbecause they may interfere with yourvehicle’s immobilizer system.

• If you attach any metal objects to theimmobilizer key, it may not start theengine.

Ignition Key Reminder (if equipped)A buzzer sounds intermittently to remindyou to remove the ignition key if it is in theignition switch when the driver’s door isopened.

KEY NUMBER:

EXAMPLE

NOTICEThe immobilizer key is a sensitiveelectronic instrument. To avoid dam-aging the immobilizer key:• Do not expose it to impacts, mois-

ture or high temperature such ason the dashboard under direct sun-light.

• Keep the immobilizer key awayfrom magnetic objects.

12

Page 24: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-2

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Door LocksSide Door LocksDriver’s door

76MH0A001

(1) LOCK(2) UNLOCK(3) Front(4) Rear

To lock a driver’s door from outside thevehicle:

• Insert the key and turn the top of the keytoward the front of the vehicle, or

• Turn the lock knob forward, then pull andhold the door handle as you close thedoor.

To unlock a driver’s door from outside thevehicle, insert the key and turn the top ofthe key toward the rear of the vehicle.

To lock a front passenger’s door from out-side the vehicle, turn the lock knob for-ward, then pull and hold the door handleas you close the door.

To lock a rear door from outside the vehi-cle, turn the lock knob forward and closethe door. You do not need to hold the doorhandle up as you close the door.

76MH0A019

(1) LOCK(2) UNLOCK

To lock a door from inside the vehicle, turnthe lock knob forward. Turn the lock knobbackward to unlock the door. You do notneed to pull and hold the door handle asyou close the door.

Central Door Locking System (if equipped)Driver’s door

76MH0A002

(1) LOCK(2) UNLOCK(3) Front(4) Rear

You can lock and unlock all doors (includ-ing the tailgate) simultaneously by usingthe key in the driver’s door lock.

To lock all doors simultaneously, insert thekey in the driver’s door lock and turn thetop of the key toward the front of the vehi-cle once.

To unlock all doors simultaneously, insertthe key in a driver’s door lock and turn thetop of the key toward the rear of the vehicletwice.

(1)

(2)(3)

(4)

(1)(2)

Door Lock Knob

EXAMPLE(3)

(1)(2)

(4)

13

Page 25: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-3

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

NOTE:You can switch the function that unlocks alldoors from twice operations to once opera-tion, and vice versa, via the setting modeof the information display. For details onhow to use the information display, refer to“Information Display” in this section.

To unlock the driver’s door only, insert thekey in that door lock and turn the top of thekey toward the rear of the vehicle once.

76MH0A020

(1) LOCK(2) UNLOCK

You can also lock or unlock all doors bydepressing the front or rear of the switch(3), respectively.

NOTE:If your vehicle is equipped with keylessentry system, you can also lock or unlockall doors by operating the transmitter.Refer to “Keyless Entry System Transmit-ter” in this section.

NOTE:• All doors are automatically unlocked

when you turn the ignition switch to the“LOCK” position and pull out the key.

• All doors are automatically locked forsafety when the vehicle speed reaches15 km/h.

• You can change the automatic locking orunlocking function mentioned above viathe setting mode of the information dis-play. For details on how to use the infor-mation display, refer to “InformationDisplay” in this section.

Child-Proof Locks (rear door)

76MH0A021

(1) LOCK(2) UNLOCK

Each of the rear doors is equipped with achild-proof lock which can be used to helpprevent unwanted opening of the door frominside the vehicle. When the lock lever is inthe “LOCK” position (1), the rear door canonly be opened from outside. When thelock lever is in the “UNLOCK” position (2),the rear door can be opened from inside oroutside.

(1)

(2)

(3)

EXAMPLE

WARNINGBe sure to place the child-proof lockin the “LOCK” position wheneverchildren are seated in the rear.

(1)

(2)

EXAMPLE

14

Page 26: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-4

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Tailgate

76MH0A086

(1) Driver’s door lock(2) Tailgate lock(3) Tailgate handle

• If your vehicle is equipped with the cen-tral door locking system, you can lock orunlock the tailgate by using the key inthe driver’s door lock (1).

• If your vehicle is not equipped with thecentral door locking system, you canlock or unlock the tailgate by using thekey in the tailgate lock (2).

To open the tailgate, pull up the tailgatehandle (3) and lift the tailgate.

If you cannot unlatch the tailgate by pullingup the tailgate handle (3) due to a dis-charged battery or malfunction, follow theprocedures below to unlatch the tailgatefrom inside the vehicle.1) Remove the luggage compartment

cover (if equipped) and fold the rearseat forward for easier access. Refer to“Folding Rear Seats” section for detailson how to fold the rear seat forward.

76MH0A099

2) Remove the trim (5) of the tailgate.• Push center of the clips (4) and pullthem out. Then, remove the trim (5).

76MH0A137

3) To unlock the tailgate lock, pull the lockplate (6) up. To open the tailgate, pushthe emergency lever (7) sideways. Thetailgate will be latched again by simplyclosing the tailgate.

If the tailgate cannot be unlatched by pull-ing up the tailgate handle (3), have thevehicle inspected by your MARUTISUZUKI dealer.

WARNINGAlways make sure that the tailgate isclosed and latched securely. Com-pletely closing the tailgate helps pre-vent occupants from being thrownfrom the vehicle in the event of anaccident. Completely closing it alsohelps keep exhaust gases from enter-ing the vehicle.

(3)

(1)

(2)

EXAMPLE

(5)

(4)

CAUTIONMake sure there is no one near thetailgate when pushing open the tail-gate from inside the vehicle.To avoid injury, do not use your fin-ger to push the emergency lever.

(6)

(7)

15

Page 27: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-5

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Keyless Entry System Transmitter (if equipped)

76MS011

(1) “LOCK” button(2) “UNLOCK” button

You can lock or unlock all doors (includingthe tailgate) simultaneously by operatingthe transmitter near the vehicle.

• To lock all doors, push the “LOCK” but-ton (1) once.

• To unlock only the driver’s door, push the“UNLOCK” button (2) once.

• To unlock other doors, push the“UNLOCK” button (2) once again.

NOTE:You can switch the function that unlocks alldoors from twice operations to once opera-tion, and vice versa, via the setting modeof the information display. For details onhow to use the information display, refer to“Information Display” in this section.

The turn signal lights will flash once andthe siren (if your vehicle is equipped withthe security system) will sound once whenthe doors are locked.

When the doors are unlocked:• The turn signal lights will flash twice and

the siren (if your vehicle is equipped withthe security system) will sound twice.

• If the interior light switch is in the“DOOR” position, the interior light willturn on for about 15 seconds and thenfade out. If you insert the key into theignition switch during this time, the lightwill start to fade out immediately.

Be sure the doors are locked after youoperate the “LOCK” button. If no door isopened within about 30 seconds after the“UNLOCK” button is operated, the doorswill automatically lock again.

NOTE:(For models with security system)• If you lock the doors using the transmit-

ter when the engine hood is open, thesiren will sound 3 times to remind you.

• If the security system was triggered dueto an unauthorized entry into the vehicleand then you unlock the doors using thetransmitter, the siren will sound 4 timesto remind you. If this happens, checkwhether your vehicle has been brokeninto while you were away from it.

• Once you push both of the “LOCK” but-ton (1) and “UNLOCK” button (2), thenyou push one of the buttons within 5 sec-

onds, the siren will not sound. However,If you push one of the buttons twicewithin 5 seconds, or push one of the but-tons 5 seconds later, the siren willsound.

• You can set whether the siren soundswhen locking or unlocking the door(s) viathe setting mode of the information dis-play. For details on how to use the infor-mation display, refer to “InformationDisplay” in this section.

NOTE:• The maximum operating distance of the

keyless entry system transmitter is about15 m (48 ft.), but this can vary dependingon the surroundings, especially nearother transmitting devices such as radiotowers or CB (Citizen’s Band) radios.

• The door locks cannot be operated withthe transmitter if the ignition key isinserted in the ignition switch.

• If any door is open, you cannot lock thedoor by operating the transmitter, how-ever unlock the door.

• If you lose one of the transmitters, askyour MARUTI SUZUKI dealer as soonas possible for a replacement. Be sureto have your dealer program the newtransmitter code in your vehicle’s mem-ory so that the old code is erased.

(1)

(2)

16

Page 28: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-6

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Panic alarm function (if equipped)This function is to get the attention of oth-ers. Push both of the “LOCK” button (1) and“UNLOCK” button (2) for more than 3 sec-onds. The turn signal lights will blink forabout 27.5 seconds. Also, the siren willsound for about 27.5 seconds at the sametime.To cancel the panic alarm, press any but-ton (LOCK or UNLOCK). You can also turnthe ignition switch to the “ON” position tocancel the panic alarm.

NOTE:The panic alarm function will not activatewhen the key is in the ignition switch.

Replacement of the BatteryIf the transmitter becomes unreliable,replace the battery.

To replace the battery of the transmitter:

68LM248

1) Remove the screw (1), and open thetransmitter cover.

2) Remove the transmitter (2).

68LM249

(3) Lithium disc type battery:CR1616 or equivalent

3) Put the edge of a flat blade screwdriverin the slot of the transmitter (2) and pryit open.

4) Replace the battery (3) so its + terminalfaces the “+” mark of the transmitter.

5) Close the transmitter and install it intothe transmitter holder.

6) Close the transmitter cover, install andtighten the screw (1).

7) Make sure the door locks can be oper-ated with the transmitter.

8) Dispose of the used battery properlyaccording to applicable rules or regula-tions. Do not dispose of lithium batter-ies with ordinary household trash.

NOTICEThe transmitter is a sensitive elec-tronic instrument. To avoid damagingthe transmitter:• Do not expose it to impacts, mois-

ture or high temperature such asby leaving it on the dashboardunder direct sunlight.

• Keep the transmitter away frommagnetic objects such as a televi-sion.

• Do not tamper with internal parts.

(1)

(2)

(2)

(3)

WARNINGSwallowing a lithium battery maycause serious internal injury. Do notallow anyone to swallow a lithiumbattery. Keep lithium batteries awayfrom children and pets. If swallowed,contact a physician immediately.

NOTICEThe transmitter is a sensitive elec-tronic instrument. To avoid damagingit, do not expose it to dust or mois-ture or tamper with internal parts.

17

Page 29: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-7

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Security System (if equipped)The security system is armed in about 5seconds after you lock all doors (includingthe tailgate) by using the keyless entry sys-tem transmitter.Once the system is armed, any attempt toopen a door by using any other means (*)than the keyless entry system transmitter,or open the engine hood, will cause thealarm to be triggered.* These means include the following:

– The key– The lock knob on a door– The central door locking switch

Also, in case that you have set the shocksensor to enabled state and set sensitivityof the pre-warning function and full blastwarning function to a level other than 0, thealarm will be triggered if any attempt totamper with the vehicle. The shock sensorcan be selected enabled or disabled state,and sensitivity of each warning can beadjusted as desired. To set the shock sen-sor, ask your MARUTI SUZUKI dealer oruse the setting mode of the informationdisplay.

NOTE:• The default setting of the shock sensor

is in the disabled state. Set to theenabled state and adjust sensitivity ofeach warning according to your prefer-ence. For details on how to use the infor-mation display, refer to “InformationDisplay” in this section.

• Your dealer may have already set theshock sensor of the vehicle to theenabled state before you purchase it.Consult your dealer for further informa-tion.

NOTE:• The security system generates alarms

when any of the predetermined condi-tions is met. However, the system doesnot have any function of blocking unau-thorized entry into the vehicle.

• Always use the keyless entry systemtransmitter to unlock the doors when thesecurity system has been armed. Usinga key instead will trigger the alarm.

• If a person who does not know the secu-rity system is going to drive the vehicle,we recommend you explain the systemand its operation to the person, or dis-able the system beforehand. Mistakenlytriggering the alarm may cause a nui-sance to others.

• Even if the security system is armed,you should still be careful to guardagainst theft. Do not leave money orthings of value in the vehicle.

How to arm the security system (when enabled)Lock all doors (including the tailgate) usingthe keyless entry system transmitter. Thesecurity system indicator (1) will start blink-ing rapidly, and the security system will bearmed in about 5 seconds.While the system is being armed, the indi-cator continues to blink at intervals ofapproximately 2 seconds.

With tachometer

76MH0B001

(1)

18

Page 30: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-8

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Without tachometer

76MH0B002

NOTE:• To prevent the alarm from being acci-

dentally triggered, avoid arming it whileanyone remains inside the vehicle. Thealarm will be triggered if any personinside opens the door or engine hood, orswings the vehicle (if the shock sensor isin the enabled state).

• The security system is not armed whenall doors are locked using the key fromoutside, or using the door lock knobs orthe central door locking switch frominside.

• If any door is not operated within approx-imately 30 seconds after the doors havebeen unlocked using the keyless entrysystem transmitter, the doors are auto-matically locked again. When the doorsare locked, the security system will be

armed in about 5 seconds if the systemis in the enabled state.

• If the security system indicator (1) blinkswhen the ignition switch is in the “ON”position, there may be something wrongwith the security system. Ask your MAR-UTI SUZUKI dealer to inspect the sys-tem.

How to disarm the security systemSimply unlock the doors using the keylessentry system transmitter. The security sys-tem indicator will go out, indicating that thesecurity system is disarmed.

How to stop the alarmShould the alarm be triggered accidentally,unlock the doors using the keyless entrysystem transmitter, or insert the key in theignition switch and turn it to “ON” position.The alarm will then stop.

NOTE:• Even after the alarm has stopped, if you

lock the doors using the keyless entrysystem transmitter, the security systemwill be rearmed with a delay of about 5seconds.

• If you disconnect the battery while thesecurity system is in the armed conditionor the alarm is actually in operation, thealarm will be re-triggered when the bat-tery is then reconnected.

• Even after the alarm has stopped at theend of the predetermined operation time,it will be triggered again if any of thedoors or engine hood is opened, or the

vehicle feels a shock (if the shock sen-sor is in the enabled state), without dis-arming the security system.

Checking whether the alarm has beentriggered during parkingIf the alarm was triggered and you thenturn the ignition switch to “ON” position, thesecurity system indicator will blink rapidlyfor about 8 seconds and a buzzer will beep4 times during this period. If this happens,check whether the vehicle has been bro-ken into while you were away from it.

Enabling and disabling the securitysystemThe security system can be either enabledor disabled.

When enabled• If any of the doors are opened without

unlocking by the keyless entry systemtransmitter, all turn signal lights start toblink and the interior buzzer beeps inter-mittently. After 5 seconds, the siren willsound for about 27.5 seconds. The secu-rity system indicator continues to blinkduring this time.

• If the engine hood is opened, all turn sig-nal lights blink, and the siren sounds forabout 27.5 seconds. The security sys-tem indicator continues to blink duringthis time.

(If the shock sensor is in the enabled state)• If the vehicle feels a shock, the siren

sounds for about 2 seconds (pre-warn-ing). If the vehicle continues to feel a

(1)

19

Page 31: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-9

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

shock, all turn signal lights start to blinkand the interior buzzer beeps intermit-tently. After 5 seconds, the siren willsound for about 27.5 seconds (full blastwarning). The security system indicatorcontinues to blink during this time.

NOTE:If you set the full blast warning sensitivityhigher than the pre-warning sensitivity inthe setting mode of the information display,or the vehicle feels such shock as to beable to trigger the full blast warning, the fullblast warning will be triggered preferen-tially. In this case, the pre-warning will notbe triggered.

When disabledWhen the system is disabled, it stays dis-armed even if you perform any systemarming operation.

How to switch the state of the securitysystemWhen the security system has beenalready disarmed, you can switch the sys-tem from the enabled state to the disabledstate, and vice versa, using the followingmethod.

1) Sit in the driver’s seat and make surethat all doors are closed, and then turnthe ignition switch to “ON” position.

• If any door is open, the open doorwarning light comes on.

76MH0B003

76MH0B004

2) Turn the lock knob (1) on the driver’sdoor rearward (2). Turn the knob on thelightning control lever to the OFF posi-tion (3).

NOTE:The following steps 3) and 4) must becompleted within 15 seconds.

76MH0B005

3) Turn the knob on the lighting controllever to the position and then turnback to the OFF position. Repeat thisoperation 4 times.

76MH0B006

(1) (2)

EXAMPLE

(3)

EXAMPLE

OFF

4 times

EXAMPLE

(4)

(6)

(5)

EXAMPLE

3 times

20

Page 32: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-10

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

4) Push the lock end (4) (forward end) ofthe central door locking switch (5), andthen push the unlock end (6) (backwardend). Repeat this operation 3 times.

Every time you perform the series of theabove steps, the state of the security sys-tem changes from the currently selectedone to the other. You can check whetherthe system is enabled or disabled by thenumber of interior buzzer beeps at the endof the procedure as follows.

• If you cannot complete the operations instep 3) and 4) within 15 seconds cor-rectly, the state of the security systemwill not change and the interior buzzerdoes not beep. Perform the procedureagain from the beginning.

NOTE:You can also switch the security systemfrom the enabled state to the disabledstate, and vice versa, via the setting modeof the information display. For details onhow to use the information display, refer to“Information Display” in this section.

WindowsManual Window Control (if equipped)

60G010

Raise or lower the door windows by turningthe handle located on the door panel.Electric Window Controls (if equipped)The electric windows can only be operatedwhen the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-tion.

Driver’s door

76MH0A022

The driver’s door has a switch (1) to oper-ate the driver’s window, and a switch (2) tooperate the front passenger’s window orthere are switches (4), (3), to operate therear left and right passenger windows,respectively.

Passenger’s door

76MH0A023

The passenger’s door has a switch (5) tooperate that passenger’s window.

81A009

System state Number of beeps

Disabled Once

Enabled 4 times

EXAMPLE

(1)(2)

(3)

(4)

EXAMPLE

(5)EXAMPLE

CLOSE

OPEN

21

Page 33: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-11

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

To open a window, push the top part of theswitch and to close the window, lift up thetop part of the switch.

The driver’s window has an “auto-down” featurefor added convenience (at toll booths or drive-through restaurants, for example). This meansyou can open the window without holding thewindow switch in the “Down” position. Press thedriver’s window switch completely down andrelease it. To stop the window before it reachesthe bottom, pull the switch up briefly.

Lock switch

76MH0A024

The driver’s door also has a lock switch forthe passenger’s windows. When you pushin the lock switch, the passenger’s win-dows cannot be raised or lowered by oper-ating any of the switches (1), (2), (3) or (4).To restore normal operation, release thelock switch by pushing again.

NOTE:If you drive with one of the rear windowsopen, you may hear a loud sound causedby air vibration. To reduce the sound, openthe driver’s or front passenger’s window, ornarrow the rear window opening.

MirrorsInside Rearview MirrorYou can adjust the inside rearview mirrorby hand so as to see the rear of your vehi-cle in the mirror.

Type 1

74LHT0235

Type 2

68LMT0205

68LMT0206

(2) Day driving(3) Night driving

EXAMPLE

WARNING• You should always lock the pas-

senger’s window operation whenthere are children in the vehicle.Children can be seriously injured ifthey get part of their body caughtby the window during operation.

• To avoid injuring an occupant bywindow entrapment, be sure nopart of the occupant’s body such ashands or head is in the path of theelectric windows when closingthem.

• Always remove the ignition keywhen leaving the vehicle even ifonly for a short time. Also do notleave children alone in a parkedvehicle. Unattended children coulduse the electric window switchesand get trapped by the window.

(1)

(2) (3)

22

Page 34: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-12

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

To adjust the mirror, set the selector tab (1)to the day position, then move the mirrorup, down or sideways by hand to obtain thebest view.

When driving at night, you can move theselector tab to the night position to reduceglare from the headlights of vehiclesbehind you.

Outside Rearview MirrorsAdjust the outside rearview mirrors so youcan just see the side of your vehicle in themirrors.

Type 1

76MH0A025

Type 2

68KH009

You can adjust the outside rear view mir-rors by hand with the knob (1) located onthe driver’s or front passenger’s doorpanel.

Electric Mirrors (if equipped)

76MH0A026

The switch to control the electric mirrors islocated on the driver’s door panel. You canadjust the mirrors when the ignition switchis in the “ACC” or “ON” position. To adjustthe mirrors:

1) Move the selector switch to the left orright to select the mirror you wish toadjust.

2) Press the outer part of the switch thatcorresponds to the direction in whichyou wish to move the mirror.

3) Return the selector switch to the centerposition to help prevent unintendedadjustment.

WARNINGBe careful when judging the size ordistance of a vehicle or other objectseen in the side convex mirror. Beaware that objects look smaller andappear farther away than when seenin a flat mirror.

EXAMPLE

(1)EXAMPLE

(2)

(4)

(3)

(1)

(1)

(3)(2)

(4)

EXAMPLE

23

Page 35: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-13

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment

76MH0A027

Seat position adjustment lever (1)Pull the lever up and slide the seat.

Seatback angle adjustment lever (2)Pull the lever up and move the seatback.

Seat height adjustment lever (3) (if equipped)Pull the lever up to raise the seat. Push thelever down to lower the seat.

After adjustment, try to move the seat andseatback forward and rearward to ensurethat it is securely latched.

Rear SeatsFolding Rear SeatsThe rear seat(s) of your vehicle can befolded forward to provide additional cargospace.

To fold the rear seats forward:

76MH0A028

1) Insert the latch plate of the outboardlap-shoulder belts into the slit (1).

WARNINGNever attempt to adjust the driver’sseat or seatback while driving. Theseat or seatback could move unex-pectedly, causing loss of control.Make sure that the driver’s seat andseatback are properly adjustedbefore you start driving.

WARNINGTo avoid excessive seat belt slack,which reduces the effectiveness ofthe seat belts as a safety device,make sure that the seats are adjustedbefore the seat belts are fastened.

WARNINGAll seatbacks should always be in anupright position when driving, or seatbelt effectiveness may be reduced.Seat belts are designed to offer maxi-mum protection when seatbacks arein the upright position.

(2)

(3) (1)

EXAMPLE

NOTICE• When you move a seatback, make

sure the latch plate is inserted intothe slit securely so the seat beltsare not caught by the seatback,seat hinge, or seat latch. This helpsprevent damage to the belt system.

• Make sure the belt webbing is nottwisted.

(1)

EXAMPLE

24

Page 36: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-14

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

76MH0A029

2) Pull up the release straps on the top ofthe seat(s), and fold the seatback for-ward.

To return the seat to the normal position,follow the procedure below.

76MH0A030

Raise the seatback until it locks into place.

After returning the seat, try moving theseatback to make sure they are securelylatched.

NOTICEAfter folding the rear seatback for-ward, do not allow any foreign mate-rial to enter the lock opening. Thismay cause damage to the inside ofthe lock and prevent the seatbackfrom being locked securely.

WARNINGIf you need to carry cargo in the pas-senger compartment with the rearseat back folded forward, be sure tosecure the cargo or it may be thrownabout, causing injury. Never pilecargo higher than the seatback.

EXAMPLE

WARNINGWhen returning the rear seatback tothe normal position, make sure thatthere is nothing around the striker.Any foreign materials prevent theseatback from being locked securely.

CAUTIONWhen returning the rear seatback tothe normal position, be careful thatyour finger is not caught between thelock and the striker.

EXAMPLE

CAUTIONDo not put your hand into the rearseatback lock opening, or your fingermay get caught and be injured.

NOTICE• When returning the rear seatback

to the normal position, do not allowany foreign material to enter thelock opening. This may prevent theseatback from being lockedsecurely.

• When returning the rear seatbackto the normal position, be sure tohandle it carefully by hand to avoidany damage to the lock itself. Donot push it by using some materialor by applying excessive force.

• As the lock is designed exclusivelyfor securing the rear seatback, donot use it for any other purpose.Incorrect use of it may cause dam-age to the inside of the lock andprevent the seatback from beinglocked securely.

25

Page 37: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-15

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems

65D231S

65D606 65D201

WARNINGWear Your Seat Belts at All Times.

WARNINGAn air bag supplements, or adds to,the frontal crash protection offeredby seat belts. The driver and all pas-sengers must be properly restrainedby wearing seat belts at all times,whether or not an air bag is mountedat their seating position, to minimizethe risk of severe injury or death inthe event of a crash.

WARNING• Never allow persons to ride in the

cargo area of a vehicle. In the eventof an accident, there is a muchgreater risk of injury for personswho are not riding in a seat withtheir seat belt securely fastened.

• Seat belts should always beadjusted as follows:– the lap portion of the belt should

be worn low across the pelvis,not across the waist.

– the shoulder straps should beworn on the outside shoulderonly, and never under the arm.

– the shoulder straps should beaway from your face and neck,but not falling off your shoulder.

(Continued)

Above the pelvis

WARNING(Continued)• Seat belts should never be worn

with the straps twisted and shouldbe adjusted as tightly as is com-fortable to provide the protectionfor which they have been designed.A slack belt will provide less pro-tection than one which is snug.

• Make sure that each seat beltbuckle is inserted into the properbuckle catch. It is possible to crossthe buckles in the rear seat.

(Continued)

Across the pelvis

26

Page 38: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-16

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

65D199

Lap-Shoulder BeltEmergency Locking Retractor (ELR)The seat belt has an emergency lockingretractor (ELR), which is designed to lockthe seat belt only during a sudden stop orimpact. It also may lock if you pull the beltacross your body very quickly. If this hap-pens, let the belt go back to unlock it, thenpull the belt across your body more slowly.

WARNING(Continued)• Pregnant women should use seat

belts, although specific recommen-dations about driving should bemade by the woman’s medical advi-sor. Remember that the lap portionof the belt should be worn as lowas possible across the hips, asshown in the diagram.

• Do not wear your seat belt overhard or breakable objects in yourpockets or on your clothing. If anaccident occurs, objects such asglasses, pens, etc. under the seatbelt can cause injury.

(Continued)

as low as possible across the hips

WARNING(Continued)• Never use the same seat belt on

more than one occupant and neverattach a seat belt over an infant orchild being held on an occupant’slap. Such seat belt use could causeserious injury in the event of anaccident.

• Periodically inspect seat beltassemblies for excessive wear anddamage. Seat belts should bereplaced if webbing becomesfrayed, contaminated, or damagedin any way. It is essential to replacethe entire seat belt assembly after ithas been worn in a severe impact,even if damage to the assembly isnot obvious.

• Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in the rearseat.

• Infants and small children shouldnever be transported unless theyare properly restrained. Restraintsystems for infants and small chil-dren can be purchased locally andshould be used. Make sure that thesystem you purchase meets appli-cable safety standards. Read andfollow all the directions provided bythe manufacturer.

• For children, if the shoulder belt irri-tates the neck or face, move thechild closer to the center of thevehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING(Continued)• Avoid contamination of seat belt

webbing by polishes, oils, chemi-cals, and particularly battery acid.Cleaning may safely be carried outusing mild soap and water.

• Do not insert any items such ascoins, clips, etc. into the seat beltbuckles, and be careful not to spillliquids into these parts. If foreignmaterials get into a seat beltbuckle, the seat belt may not workproperly.

• All seatbacks should always be inan upright position when driving,or seat belt effectiveness may bereduced. Seat belts are designed tooffer maximum protection whenseatbacks are in the upright posi-tion.

27

Page 39: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-17

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Safety reminder

60A038

60A040

To reduce the risk of sliding under the beltduring a collision, position the lap portionof the belt across your lap as low on yourhips as possible and adjust it to a snug fitby pulling the shoulder portion of the beltupward through the latch plate. The length

of the diagonal shoulder strap adjusts itselfto allow freedom of movement.All Seat Belts Except Rear CenterAll seat belts except rear center are thelap-shoulder belt.

60A036

To fasten the seat belt, sit up straight andwell back in the seat, pull the latch plateattached to the seat belt across your bodyand press it straight into the buckle untilyou hear a “click”.

60A039

To unfasten the seat belt, push the buttonon the buckle and retract the belt slowlywhile attaching a hand to the belt or/andthe latch plate.

Rear Center Seat BeltRear center seat belt is the lap belt.To fasten the belt, pull the latch plateattached to the seat belt across your hipsand press it straight into the buckle untilyou hear a “click”. To reduce the risk ofsliding under the belt during a collision,position the belt across your lap as low onyour hips as possible and adjust it to asnug fit.

80JS028

To tighten the belt, pull the free end of thebelt across alongside the lap strap.

Sit up straight and fully back

Low on hips

Low on hips TO TIGHTEN

Low on hips

28

Page 40: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-18

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

80JS029

To lengthen, release the latch plate fromthe buckle, pull the latch plate (adjuster) inthe direction of the arrow, at right angles tothe belt. The latch plate should then berefitted into the buckle and the belt tight-ened as previously described.

To unfasten the belt, press the release but-ton on the buckle catch.

80JS031

NOTE:To identify the center seat belt buckle andlatch plate in the rear seat, “CENTER” ismarked on the buckle and latch plate of thecenter lap belt. The buckles are designedso a latch plate cannot be inserted into thewrong buckle.

Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder (if equipped)With tachometer

76MH028

Without tachometer

76MS013

When the driver doesn’t buckle his or herseat belt with the ignition switch in the “ON”position, the driver’s seat belt reminderlight in the instrument cluster will blink untilthe driver’s seat belt is buckled.

TO LOOSEN

Right angle EXAMPLE

WARNINGIt is absolutely essential that thedriver and passengers wear their seatbelts at all times. Persons who arenot wearing seat belts have a muchgreater risk of injury if an accidentoccurs. Make a regular habit of buck-ling your seat belt before putting thekey in the ignition.

EXAMPLE

29

Page 41: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-19

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Seat Belt Hanger

76MH0A028

Seat Belt Inspection

65D209S

Periodically inspect the seat belts to makesure they work properly and are not dam-aged. Check the webbing, buckles, latchplates, retractors, anchorages, and guideloops. Replace any seat belts which do notwork properly or are damaged.

Child Restraint Systems

60G332S

Infant restraint

79J221

NOTICE• When you move a seatback, make

sure the latch plate is inserted intothe slit (1) securely so the seatbelts are not caught by the seat-back, seat hinge, or seat latch. Thishelps prevent damage to the beltsystem.

• Make sure the belt webbing is nottwisted.

(1)

EXAMPLE

WARNINGBe sure to inspect all seat belt assem-blies after any collision. Any seat beltassembly which was in use during acollision (other than a very minor one)should be replaced, even if damage tothe assembly is not obvious. Any seatbelt assembly which was not in useduring a collision should be replacedif it does not function properly or it isdamaged in any way was activated.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

30

Page 42: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-20

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Child restraint

79J222

Booster seat

79J223

MARUTI SUZUKI highly recommends thatyou use a child restraint system to restraininfants and small children. Many differenttypes of child restraint systems are avail-

able; make sure that the restraint systemyou select meets applicable safety stan-dards.

All child restraint systems are designed tobe secured on vehicle seats by either seatbelts (lap belts or the lap portion of lap-shoulder belts). Whenever possible, MAR-UTI SUZUKI recommends that childrestraint systems be installed on the rearseat. According to accident statistics, chil-dren are safer when properly restrained inrear seating positions than in front seatingpositions.

If you must use a front-facing child restraintin the front passenger’s seat, adjust thepassenger’s seat as far back as possible.

NOTE:Observe any statutory regulation aboutchild restraints.

58MS030

65D608

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

WARNINGIf your vehicle is equipped with afront passenger air bag, do not installa rear-facing child restraint in thefront passenger’s seat. If the passen-ger’s air bag inflates, a child in a rear-facing child restraint could be killedor seriously injured. The back of arear-facing child restraint would betoo close to the inflating air bag.

WARNINGIf you install a child restraint system inthe rear seat, slide the front seat farenough forward so that the child’s feetdo not touch the front seatback. Thiswill help avoid injury to the child in theevent of an accident.

31

Page 43: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-21

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

65D609

Installation with Lap-Shoulder Seat Belts

ELR type belt

80JC021

Install your child restraint system accord-ing to the instructions provided by the childrestraint system manufacturer.

Make sure that the seat belt is securelylatched.

Try to move the child restraint system in alldirections to make sure it is securelyinstalled.

WARNINGChildren could be endangered in acrash if their child restraints are notproperly secured in the vehicle.When installing a child restraint sys-tem, be sure to follow the instruc-tions below. Be sure to secure thechild in the restraint system accord-ing to the manufacturer’s instruc-tions.

NOTICEBefore installing a child restraint sys-tem in the rear seat, raise the headrestraint (if equipped) to the mostupper position.

EXAMPLE

32

Page 44: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-22

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Child Restraint System for IndiaChild Restraint

The suitability of each passenger’s seat position for carriage of children and fitting of child restraint system is shown in the table below. Whenever you carry children up to 12 years of age, properly use the child restraints which conform to AIS 072, the standard for child restraints, referring to the table.

MASS GROUP

Seating position (or other site)

Front Passenger

Rear Outboard

Rear Centre

Intermediate Outboard

Intermediate Centre

Group 0Up to 10 kg X U X N.A. N.A.

Group 0+Up to 13 kg X U X N.A. N.A.

Group I9 to 18 kg X U X N.A. N.A.

Group II15 to 25 kg X U X N.A. N.A.

Group III22 to 36 kg X U X N.A. N.A.

Key of letters to be inserted in the above table:U =Suitable for ‘universal’ category restraints approved for use in this mass groupX =Seat position not suitable for children in this mass groupN.A = Seat position not available for children in this mass group. NOTE: ‘universal’ is the category in the AIS 072.

33

Page 45: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-23

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Supplemental Restraint System (air bags) (if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a Supplemen-tal Restraint System consisting of the follow-

ing components in addition to a lap-shoulderbelt at each front seating position.

1. Driver’s front air bag module (ifequipped)

2. Front passenger’s front air bag module(if equipped)

3. Air bag controller (if equipped)4. Forward crash sensor (if equipped)

“AIR BAG” light (if equipped)

63J030

If the “AIR BAG” light on the instrumentcluster does not blink or come on when theignition switch is first turned to the “ON”position, or the “AIR BAG” light stays on, orcomes on while driving, the air bag systemmay not work properly. Have the air bagsystem inspected by an authorized MAR-UTI SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible.

Air bag symbol (if equipped) meaning

72M00150

You may find this label on the sun visor.

Front Air Bags (if equipped)

63J259

WARNINGThis section of the owner’s manualdescribes the protection provided byyour MARUTI SUZUKI’s SUPPLE-MENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (airbags). Please read and follow ALL theseinstructions carefully to minimizeyour risk of severe injury or death inthe event of a collision.

2

3

4

1

EXAMPLE

WARNINGAn air bag supplements, or adds to,the crash protection offered by seatbelts. The driver and all passengersmust be properly restrained by wear-ing seat belts at all times, whether ornot an air bag is mounted at their seat-ing position, to minimize the risk ofsevere injury or death in the event of acrash.

WARNINGNEVER use a rearward facing childrestraint on a seat protected by anACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATHor SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD canoccur.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

34

Page 46: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-24

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Front air bags are designed to inflate insevere frontal collisions when the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” position.

Front air bags are not designed to inflate inrear impacts, side impacts, rollovers orminor frontal collisions, since they wouldoffer no protection in those types of acci-dents. Remember, since an air bagdeploys only one time during an accident,seat belts are needed to restrain occu-pants from further movements during theaccident.

Therefore, an air bag is NOT a substitutefor seat belts. To maximize your protection,ALWAYS WEAR YOUR SEAT BELTS. Beaware that no system can prevent all pos-sible injuries that may occur in an accident.

Driver’s front air bag (if equipped)

76MH0A033

Front passenger’s front air bag (if equipped)

76MH0A034

The driver’s front air bag is located behindthe center pad of the steering wheel andthe front passenger’s front air bag islocated behind the passenger’s side of thedashboard. The words “SRS AIRBAG” are molded intothe air bag covers to identify the location ofthe air bags.

58MS030

Please refer to the “Seat Belts and ChildRestraint Systems” section in this sectionfor details on securing your child.Conditions of front air bags deployment(inflation)

80J097

• In frontal collisions with a fixed wall thatdoes not move or deform in more thanabout 25 km/h (15 mph)

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

WARNINGDo not install a rear-facing childrestraint in the front passenger’sseat. If the passenger’s front air baginflates, a child in a rear-facing childrestraint could be killed or severelyinjured. The back of a rear-facingchild restraint would be too close tothe inflating air bag.

(1)

(1)

35

Page 47: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-25

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

• In collisions such as above at an angle ofabout 30 degrees (1) or less from thefront

Conditions of front air bags may inflateReceiving a strong impact to the lower bodyof your vehicle, the front air bags will inflatein many cases.

80J099

• Hitting a curb or medial strip

80J100E

• Falling into a deep hole or ditch

• Landing hard or fallingFront air bags may inflate in a strongimpact

80J120

• Collision from the rear

80J119

• Collision from the side

80J110

• Vehicle rollover

Front air bags may not inflateThe front air bags may not inflate when theimpact is absorbed since the collisionobject moved, vehicle body deformed, or

collision angle was greater than about 30degrees from the front.

80J102

• Approximately 50 km/h (30 mph) orlower speed frontal collision to a stoppedvehicle

80J103

• Collision that the front of your vehiclegoes under the bed of a truck etc.

80J104

• Collision with a utility pole or stumpage

36

Page 48: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-26

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

80J105E

• Collision with a fixed wall or guardrail atan angle of greater than about 30degrees (1) from the front

80J106

• In frontal collisions with a fixed wall thatdoes not move or deform in less thanabout 25 km/h (15 mph)

80J107

• Collision angle is offset from the vehicleangle (offset collision)

How the system worksIn a frontal collision, the crash sensors willdetect rapid deceleration, and if the control-ler judges that the deceleration represents asevere frontal crash, the controller will trig-ger the inflators. The inflators inflate the airbags with nitrogen or argon gas. Theinflated air bags provide a cushion for yourhead and upper body. The air bag inflatesand deflates so quickly that you may noteven realize that it has activated. The airbag will neither hinder your view nor make itharder to exit the vehicle.

Air bags must inflate quickly and forcefully inorder to reduce the chance of serious orfatal injuries. However, an unavoidable con-sequence of the quick inflation is that the airbag may irritate bare skin, such as the facialarea. Also, upon inflation, a loud noise willoccur and some powder and smoke will bereleased. These conditions are not harmfuland do not indicate a fire in the vehicle. Beaware, however, that some air bag compo-nents may be hot for a while after inflation.

A seat belt helps keep you in the properposition for maximum protection when an airbag inflates. Adjust your seat as far back aspossible while still maintaining control of thevehicle. Sit fully back in your seat; sit upstraight; do not lean over the steering wheelor dashboard. Please refer to the “FrontSeat” section and the “Seat Belts and ChildRestraint Systems” section in this sectionfor details on proper seat and seat beltadjustments.

65D610

(1)

WARNING• The driver should not lean over the

steering wheel. The front passen-ger should not rest his or her bodyagainst the dashboard, or other-wise get too close to the dash-board. In these situations, the out-of-position occupant would be tooclose to an inflating air bag, andmay suffer severe injury.

• Do not attach any objects to, orplace any objects over, the steeringwheel or dashboard. Do not placeany objects between the air bagand the driver or front passenger.These objects may interfere with airbag operation or may be propelledby the air bag in the event of acrash. Either of these conditionsmay cause severe injury.

37

Page 49: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-27

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Note that even though your vehicle may bemoderately damaged in a frontal collision,the collision may not have been severeenough to trigger the air bags to inflate. Ifyour vehicle sustains ANY front-end dam-age, have the air bag system inspected byan authorized MARUTI SUZUKI dealer toensure it is in proper working order.

Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnosticmodule which records information aboutthe air bag system if the air bags deploy ina crash. The module records informationabout overall system status, which sensorsactivated the deployment, and for a certainvehicle only, whether the driver’s seat beltwas in use.

Servicing the air bag systemIf the air bags inflate, have the air bags andrelated components replaced by an autho-rized MARUTI SUZUKI dealer as soon aspossible.

If your vehicle ever gets in deep water andthe driver’s floor is submerged, the air bagcontroller could be damaged. If it does,have the air bag system inspected by theMARUTI SUZUKI dealer as soon as possi-ble.

Special procedures are required for servic-ing or replacing an air bag. For that reason,only an authorized MARUTI SUZUKIdealer should be allowed to service orreplace your air bags. Please remind any-

one who services your vehicle that it hasair bags.

Service on or around air bag componentsor wiring must be performed only by anauthorized MARUTI SUZUKI dealer.Improper service could result in unin-tended air bag deployment or could renderthe air bag inoperative. Either of these twoconditions may result in severe injury.

To prevent damage or unintended inflationof the air bag system, be sure the batteryis disconnected and the ignition switch hasbeen in the “LOCK” position for at least 90seconds before performing any electricalservice work on your vehicle. Do not touchair bag system components or wires. Thewires are wrapped with yellow tape or yel-low tubing, and the couplers are yellow foreasy identification.

Scrapping a vehicle that has an uninflatedair bag can be hazardous. Ask your dealer,body repair shop or scrap yard for helpwith disposal.

38

Page 50: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-28

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

Instrument Cluster1. Speedometer2. Tachometer (if equipped)3. Information display4. Trip meter selector knob5. Indicator selector knob6. Warning and indicator lights

With tachometer

Without tachometer

EXAMPLE

6 564 1

2 6 3

For Diesel

2

6 564 1

3 EXAMPLE

39

Page 51: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-29

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

SpeedometerThe speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

Tachometer (if equipped)The tachometer indicates engine speed inrevolutions per minute.

Fuel GaugeWith tachometer

76MH0A037

Without tachometer

76MH0A038

When the ignition switch is in the “ON”position, this gauge gives an approximateindication of the amount of fuel in the fueltank. “F” stands for full and “E” stands forempty.

If the fuel meter indicator shows only onesegment to “E”, refill the tank as soon aspossible.

NOTE:If the last segment blinks, it means that thefuel is almost empty.

If the low fuel warning light (1) comes on,fill the fuel tank immediately.

NOTE:The activation point of the low fuel warninglight (1) varies depending on road condi-tions (for example, slope or curve) anddriving conditions because of fuel movingin the tank.

Refer to “Low Fuel Warning Light” in“Warning and Indicator Lights” in this sec-tion for details.

The mark (2) indicates that the fuel fillerdoor is located on the left side of the vehi-cle.

Brightness Control

76MH0A039

When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position, the pointer lights come on.

Your vehicle has a system to automaticallydim the brightness of the instrument panellights when the position lights or headlightsare on.

When the position lights and/or headlightsare ON, you can control the meter illumina-tion intensity.

NOTICENever drive the vehicle with theengine revving in the red zone, orsevere engine damage can result.Keep the engine speed below the redzone even when downshifting to alower gear position. Refer to “Down-shifting maximum allowable speeds”in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE”section.

(1)(2)

EXAMPLE

(1)

(2)

EXAMPLE (1)

EXAMPLE

40

Page 52: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-30

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

To increase the brightness of the instru-ment panel lights, turn the brightness con-trol knob (1) clockwise.To reduce the brightness of the instrumentpanel lights, turn the brightness controlknob (1) counterclockwise.

NOTE:• If you do not turn the brightness control

knob within about 5 seconds of activat-ing the brightness control display, thebrightness control display will be can-celed automatically.

• When you reconnect the battery, thebrightness of the instrument panel lightswill be reinitialized. Readjust the bright-ness according to your preference.

Information Display

76MH0A032

with tachometer

76MH0A040

without tachometer

76MH0A041

(1) Trip meter selector knob(2) Indicator selector knob(3) Information display

When the ignition switch is in the “ON”position, the information display shows thefollowing information.

Display (A)Clock

Display (B)Fuel gauge

Display (C)Trip meter / Odometer / Fuel consumption /Driving range

Display (D)Gear position indicator (for Auto Gear Shiftmodels)

Display (E)Thermometer (if equipped)

WARNINGIf you attempt to adjust the displaywhile driving, you could lose controlof the vehicle.

Do not attempt to adjust the displaywhile driving.

(2)

(1)EXAMPLE

(3)

(A) (E)

(B)

(C)

(D)

EXAMPLE

(3)

(A)

(B) (C)

EXAMPLE

41

Page 53: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-31

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

ClockWhen the ignition switch is in the “ON”position, the display (A) shows the time.

To change the time indication: 1) Push the trip meter selector knob (1)

and the indicator selector knob (2)together.

2) To change the hour indication, turn theindicator selector knob (2) left or rightrepeatedly when the hour indicationblinks. To change the hour indicationquickly, turn and hold the indicator selec-tor knob (2). To set the hour indication,push the indicator selector knob (2) andthe minute indication will blink.

3) To change the minute indication, turn theindicator selector knob (2) left or rightrepeatedly when the minute indicationblinks. To change the minute indicationquickly, turn and hold the indicator selec-tor knob (2). To set the minute indication,push the indicator selector knob (2).

NOTE:When you reconnect the negative (–) ter-minal to the battery, the clock indication willbe reinitialized. Change the indicationagain to your preference.

Fuel GaugeWhen the ignition switch is in the “ON”position, the display (B) shows the fuelgauge.

Refer to “Fuel Gauge” in this section.

Trip meter / Odometer / Fuel con-sumption / Driving rangeWhen the ignition switch is in the “ON”position, the display (C) shows one of thefollowing indications, trip meter A, tripmeter B, odometer, instantaneous fuelconsumption, average fuel consumption ordriving range.

To switch the display indication (C), pushthe trip meter selector knob (1) or the indi-cator selector knob (2) quickly.

76MH0A045

WARNINGIf you attempt to adjust the displaywhile driving, you could lose controlof the vehicle.

Do not attempt to adjust the displaywhile driving.

Push the trip meter selectorknob (1).

Push the indicator selectorknob (2).

(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

(e)

(f)

EXAMPLE

42

Page 54: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-32

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

(a) Trip meter A(b) Trip meter B(c) Odometer(d) Instantaneous fuel consumption(e) Average fuel consumption(f) Driving range

NOTE:• Indications will change when you push

and release a knob.• The display shows estimated values.

Indications may not be the same asactual values.

Trip meterThe trip meter can be used to measure thedistance traveled on short trips or betweenfuel stops.You can use the trip meter A or trip meter Bindependently.

To reset the trip meter to zero, push andhold the trip meter selector knob (1) for awhile when the display shows the tripmeter.

NOTE:The indicated maximum value of the tripmeter is 9999.9. When you run past the

maximum value, the indicated value willreturn to 0.0.

OdometerThe odometer records the total distancethe vehicle has been driven.

Instantaneous Fuel ConsumptionThe display shows the value of instanta-neous fuel consumption only when the vehi-cle is moving.

NOTE:• The display does not show the value

unless the vehicle is moving.• The indicated maximum value of instanta-

neous fuel consumption is 30. No morethan 30 will be indicated on the displayeven if the actual instantaneous fuel con-sumption is higher.

• The indication on the display may bedelayed if fuel consumption is greatlyaffected by driving conditions.

• The display shows estimated values. Indi-cations may not be the same as actualvalues.

• You can change the units that instanta-neous fuel consumption is displayed in.Refer to “Average fuel consumption” inthis section.

Average fuel consumptionIf you selected average fuel consumptionthe last time you drove the vehicle, the dis-play shows the last value of average fuelconsumption from previous driving whenthe ignition switch is turned to the “ON”position. Unless you reset the value of aver-age fuel consumption, the display indicatesthe value of average fuel consumptionwhich includes average fuel consumptionduring previous driving.

To reset the average fuel consumption tozero, push and hold the indicator selectorknob (2) for a while when the displayshows the average fuel consumption.

NOTE:When you reset the indication or reconnectthe negative (–) terminal to the battery, thevalue of average fuel consumption will beshown after driving for a while.

To change the unit of average fuel con-sumption, while pushing and holding thetrip meter selector knob (1), turn the indi-cator selector knob (2).

76MH0A046

WARNINGIf you attempt to adjust the displaywhile driving, you could lose controlof the vehicle.

Do not attempt to adjust the displaywhile driving.

NOTICEKeep track of your odometer readingand check the maintenance scheduleregularly for required services.Increased wear or damage to certainparts can result from failure to performrequired services at the proper mile-age intervals.

EXAMPLE

(Initial setting)

43

Page 55: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-33

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

NOTE:• When you change the units that average

fuel consumption is displayed in, theinstantaneous fuel consumption units willbe changed automatically.

• When you reconnect the negative (–) ter-minal to the battery, the unit of the aver-age fuel consumption will be reinitialized.Change the unit again to your preference.

Driving rangeIf you selected driving range the last timeyou drove the vehicle, the display indicates“---” for a few seconds and then indicatesthe current driving range when the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” position.The driving range shown in the display isthe approximate distance you can drive untilthe fuel gauge indicates “E”, based on cur-rent driving conditions.

When the low fuel warning light comes on,the display “---” will appear.

If the low fuel warning light comes on, fill thefuel tank immediately regardless of the valueof driving range shown in the display.

As the driving range after refueling is calcu-lated based on the most recent driving con-dition, the value is different each time yourefuel.

NOTE:• If you refuel when the ignition switch is in

the “ON” position, the driving range maynot indicate the correct value.

• When you reconnect the negative (–) ter-minal to the battery, the value of drivingrange will be shown after driving for awhile.

Gear position indicator (for Auto Gear Shift models)

76MH0A044

When the ignition switch is in the “ON”position, the display (D) indicates the gearposition.For details on how to use the transaxle,refer to “Using the Transaxle” in the“OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.

Thermometer (if equipped)When the ignition switch is in the “ON”position, the display (E) shows the ther-mometer.The thermometer indicates the outsidetemperature.

76MH0A042

If the outside temperature nears freezing,the mark (g) will appear on the display.

NOTE:• The outside temperature indication is not

the actual outside temperature when driv-ing at low speed, or when stopped.

• If there is something wrong with the ther-mometer, or just after the ignition switchis turned to the “ON” position, the displaymay not indicate the outside temperature.

When the display (C) shows the drivingrange, you can change the unit of tempera-ture.To change the unit of temperature, whilepushing and holding the trip meter selectorknob (1), turn the indicator selector knob(2).

76MH0A043

NOTE:When you reconnect the negative (–) ter-minal to the battery, the unit of temperaturewill be reinitialized. Change the unit againto your preference.

EXAMPLE

(g)EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

(Initial setting)

44

Page 56: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-34

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Setting ModeIn the setting mode, you can set up the following functions.

Indication Functions

Temperature unit (if equipped) “tE”

Time indication of clock “CL”

Central door locking system “d1”

Automatic door locking function “d2”

Automatic door unlocking function “d3”

Door locking and unlocking siren “d5”

45

Page 57: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-35

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Additional flashes of the turn signal “L2”

Security system “S1”

Shock sensor “S2”

Pre-warning sensitivity of the shock sensor “S3”

Full blast warning sensitivity of the shock sensor “S4”

Initialization setting “de-on”

Exit the setting mode “End”

Indication Functions

46

Page 58: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-36

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

NOTE:Depending on vehicle’s specifications,some items may not be displayed.

How to operate the setting mode:1) When the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position and the vehicle is stationary,push the trip meter selector knob (1) toswitch the information display indication(C) to the odometer.

2) Push and hold the indicator selectorknob (2) until the display shows “tEnP”or “CLoCK”.

3) Turn and/or push the indicator selectorknob (2) to select a function that youwant to set up according to the abovechart.

4) Turn and/or push the indicator selectorknob (2) to register settings of the fol-lowing functions.

Temperature unit (if equipped) “tE”• tE-CEL: °C setting (default setting)• tE-FAh: °F setting

Time indication of clock “CL”• CL-12h: 12-hour format (default setting)• CL-24h: 24-hour format

Central door locking system “d1”• d1-SL1: Unlock all doors by turning the

key or pushing the keylessentry system transmitter once

• d1-SL2: Unlock all doors by turning thekey or pushing the keylessentry system transmitter twice(default setting)

Automatic door locking function “d2”• d2-SL1: Disable the automatic door

locking function• d2-SL2: Lock all doors when the vehicle

speed reaches 15 km/h (defaultsetting)

Automatic door unlocking function “d3”• d3-SL1: Disable the automatic door

unlocking function• d3-SL3: Unlock all doors when the key

is pulled out from the ignitionswitch (default setting)

Door locking and unlocking siren “d5”• d5-SL1: Siren sounds when the door(s)

is(are) locked or unlocked byusing the keyless entry systemtransmitter (default setting)

• d5-SL2: Siren does not sound when thedoor(s) is(are) locked orunlocked by using the keylessentry system transmitter

Additional flashes of the turn signal “L2”• L2-SL1: Turn signal flashes three times

after the turn signal lever isreturned (default setting)

• L2-SL2: Disable the additional flashesof turn signal

Security system “S1”• S1-SL1: Enable the security system

(default setting)• S1-SL2: Disable the security system

Shock sensor “S2”• S2-SL1: Enable the shock sensor• S2-SL2: Disable the shock sensor

(default setting)Pre-warning sensitivity of the shock sensor “S3”• S3-L00: Disable the pre-warning• S3-L01 to L15:

Adjust the pre-warning sensitiv-ity of shock sensor (Lowestsensitivity level is L01 and high-est is L15, and default setting isL14)

Full blast warning sensitivity of the shock sensor “S4”• S4-L00: Disable the full blast warning• S4-L01 to L15:

Adjust the full blast warningsensitivity of shock sensor(Lowest sensitivity level is L01and highest is L15, and defaultsetting is L09)

Initialization setting “de-on”• de-on: Initialize all settings

Turn the indicator selector knob(2).

Push the indicator selectorknob (2).

47

Page 59: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-37

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

76MH0017

NOTE:• As shown in the above illustration,

“ ” indicates on the display of cur-rently setting item.

• To go back to the higher level displayduring operation, turn the indicatorselector knob (2) to display “bACK” or“-bAC” and then push the indicatorselector knob (2).

• If the security system “S1” is in the dis-abled state, the shock sensor “S2”, pre-warning sensitivity “S3” and full blastwarning sensitivity “S4” cannot be setup.

5) To exit the setting mode, switch the dis-play to show “End” and then push theindicator selector knob (2).

Warning and Indicator LightsBrake System Warning Light

65D477

Three different types of operations existdepending on the vehicle’s specification.

1) The light comes on briefly when theignition switch is turned to the “ON”position.

2) The light comes on when the parkingbrake is engaged with the ignitionswitch in the “ON” position.

3) The light comes on when under eitheror both of above two conditions.

The light also comes on when the fluid inthe brake fluid reservoir falls below thespecified level.The light should go out after starting theengine and fully releasing the parkingbrake, if the fluid level in the brake fluid res-ervoir is adequate.The light also comes on together with theABS warning light when the rear brakeforce control function (proportioning valvefunction) of the ABS system fails.If the brake system warning light comes onwhile you are driving the vehicle, it maymean that there is something wrong with

the vehicle’s brake system. If this happens,you should:

1) Pull off the road and stop carefully.

2) Test the brakes by carefully starting andstopping at the side of the road.

– If you determine that it is safe, drivecarefully at low speed to the nearestdealer for repairs, or

– Have the vehicle towed to the nearestdealer for repairs.

EXAMPLE

WARNINGRemember that stopping distancemay be longer, you may have to pushharder on the pedal, and the pedalmay go down farther than normal.

WARNINGIf any of the following conditionsoccur, you should immediately askyour MARUTI SUZUKI dealer toinspect the brake system.• If the brake system warning light

does not go out after the enginehas been started and the parkingbrake has been fully released.

• If the brake system warning lightdoes not come on when the igni-tion switch is turned to the “ON”position.

• If the brake system warning lightcomes on at any time during vehi-cle operation.

48

Page 60: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-38

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

NOTE:Because the disc brake system is self-adjusting, the fluid level will drop as thebrake pads become worn. Replenishingthe brake fluid reservoir is considered nor-mal periodic maintenance.

NOTE:(Parking Brake Reminder Buzzer) (ifequipped)A buzzer sounds intermittently to remindyou to release the parking brake if youstart the vehicle without releasing the park-ing brake. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and the brake sys-tem warning light turns off.

Seat Belt Warning Light (if equipped)

60G049

This light blinks as a reminder until thedriver’s seat belt is buckled.

For details about the seat belt reminder,refer to “Seat Belts and Child RestraintSystems” in this section.

“AIR BAG” Light (if equipped)

63J030

This light blinks or comes on for severalseconds when the ignition switch is turnedto the “ON” position so you can check if thelight is working.

The light will come on and stay on if thereis a problem in the air bag system (ifequipped).

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light (if equipped)

65D529

When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position, the light comes on briefly soyou can check that the light is working.If the light stays on, or comes on whendriving, there may be something wrongwith the ABS.

If this happens: 1) Pull off the road and stop carefully.2) Turn the ignition switch to “LOCK” and

then start the engine again.

If the warning light comes on briefly thenturns off, the system is normal. If the warn-ing light still stays on, the system will besomething wrong.

If the light and the brake system warninglight stay on, or come on simultaneouslywhen driving, your ABS system isequipped with the rear brake force controlfunction (proportioning valve function) andthere may be something wrong with boththe rear brake force control function andanti-lock function of the ABS system.

WARNINGIf the “AIR BAG” light does not blinkor come on briefly when the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” position,stays on for more than 10 seconds,or comes on while driving, the air bagsystem (if equipped) may not workproperly. Have both systemsinspected by an authorized MARUTISUZUKI dealer.

49

Page 61: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-39

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

If one of these happens, have the systeminspected by your MARUTI SUZUKIdealer. If the ABS becomes inoperative, the brakesystem will function as an ordinary brakesystem that does not have this ABS sys-tem.

Malfunction Indicator Light

63J031

Your vehicle has a computer-controlledemission control system. A malfunctionindicator light is provided on the instrumentpanel to indicate when it is necessary tohave the emission control system serviced.The malfunction indicator light comes onwhen the ignition switch is turned to “ON”position to let you know the light is workingand goes out when the engine is started.

If the malfunction indicator light comes onwhen the engine is running, there is adamage with the emission control system.Bring the vehicle to your MARUTI SUZUKIdealer to have the damage fixed.

Also, if the light comes on, there may besomething wrong with the Auto Gear Shiftsystem. Have the system inspected by anauthorized MARUTI SUZUKI dealer.

Transaxle Warning Light (if equipped)

80J219

This light comes on for several secondswhen the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position so you can check the light isworking.If this light comes on when the engine isrunning, there is a problem with the AutoGear Shift system. Ask your MARUTISUZUKI dealer to have the systeminspected.

NOTE:If the Auto Gear Shift system temperaturebecomes too high, this light will blink. Stopthe vehicle in a safe place and let the sys-tem cool down.

Electric Power Steering Light

79J039

This light comes on when the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” position, andgoes out when the engine is started.

If this light comes on while driving, thepower steering system may not work prop-erly. Have the system inspected by yourMARUTI SUZUKI dealer.

NOTE:Following operations of the steering wheelwhile parking or driving at a very low-speed may have steering effort biggergradually. This is not a malfunction of thesteering system, but the power steeringcontrol system limits the power assist inorder to prevent them from overheating.• The steering wheel is operated very

often.• The steering wheel is kept in a fully

turned position for a long while. When the power steering control systemcool down, the power steering systemback to the original condition.However, repeating these operations couldcause the power steering system dam-aged.

NOTICEContinuing to drive the vehicle whenthe malfunction indicator light is oncan cause permanent damage to thevehicle’s emission control system,and can affect fuel economy anddriveability.

50

Page 62: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-40

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

NOTE:If the power steering system does not workproperly, you will feel heavier to steer butyou still will be able to steer.

NOTE:If the steering is operated, you may hear anoise. This is normal and indicates that thepower steering system works properly.

Oil Pressure Light

50G051

This light comes on when the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” position, andgoes out when the engine is started. Thelight will come on and remain on if there isinsufficient oil pressure. If the light comeson when driving, pull off the road as soonas you can and stop the engine. Check the oil level and add oil if necessary.If there is enough oil, the lubrication sys-tem should be inspected by your MARUTISUZUKI dealer before you drive the vehi-cle again.

Charging Light

50G052

This light comes on when the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” position, andgoes out when the engine is started. Thelight will come on and remain on if there issomething wrong with the battery chargingsystem. If the light comes on when theengine is running, the charging systemshould be inspected immediately by yourMARUTI SUZUKI dealer.

High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light (red color)

54G344

When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position, this light comes on briefly soyou can check that the light is working. Ifthis light blinks while driving, it means theengine is running hot. Avoid driving condi-tions that may lead to actual overheating. Ifthe light stays on without blinking, then theengine is overheating. Follow the instruc-tions in the “If the Engine Overheats” of“EMERGENCY SERVICE” section.

NOTICE• If you operate the engine with this

light on, severe engine damage canresult.

• Do not rely on the Oil PressureLight to indicate the need to addoil. Be sure to periodically checkthe engine oil level.

NOTICEContinuing to drive the vehicle whenengine overheating is indicated canresult in severe engine damage.

51

Page 63: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-41

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Immobilizer System Light

80JM122

When the ignition switch is turn to the “ON”position, this light comes on briefly so youcan check that the light is working. If thislight brinks with the ignition switch is turn tothe “ON” , the engine will not start.

NOTE:If this light blinks, turn the ignition switch tothe “LOCK” position, then turn it back tothe “ON” position.If the light still blinks with the ignition switchturned to the “ON” position, there may besomething wrong with your key or with theimmobilizer system. Ask your MARUTISUZUKI dealer to inspect the system.

Open Door Warning Light

54G391

This light remains on until all doors (includ-ing the tailgate) are completely closed.

If any door (including the tailgate) is openwhen the vehicle is moving, a ding soundsto remind you to close all doors completely.

Low Fuel Warning Light

54G343

If this light comes on, fill the fuel tankimmediately.

When this light comes on, a ding soundsonce to remind you to fill the fuel.If you do not fill the fuel, a ding soundsevery time when the ignition switch isturned to the “ON” position.

NOTE:The activation point of this light variesdepending on road conditions (for exam-ple, slope or curve) and driving conditionsbecause of fuel moving in the tank.

Turn Signal Indicators

50G055

When you turn on the left or right turn sig-nals, the corresponding green arrow on theinstrument panel will flash along with therespective turn signal lights. When youturn on the hazard warning switch, botharrows will flash along with all of the turnsignal lights.

Main Beam (high beam) Indicator Light

50G056

This indicator comes on when headlightmain beams (high beams) are turned on.

Security System Indicator (if equipped)

82K269

For details about the security system, referto “Security System” in this section.

52

Page 64: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-42

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

NOTE:If the security system indicator blinks whenthe ignition switch is in the “ON” position,there may be something wrong with thesecurity system. Ask your MARUTISUZUKI dealer to inspect the system.

Depress Brake Pedal Indicator (if equipped)

76MH0A047

Refer to “Auto Gear Shift” in the “OPERAT-ING YOUR VEHICLE” section for details.

Fuel Filter Warning Light (For Diesel Engine Model)

60A541

This light comes on for several secondswhen the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position so you can check the light isworking.

If the light comes on when driving, there isa possibility to have water in the fuel filter.Drain water as soon as possible. For

details of draining water, refer to “Fuel Fil-ter” in the “INSPECTION AND MAINTE-NANCE” section.

Glow Plug Indicator Light (For Diesel Engine Model)

60A543

If the coolant temperature is cool enough,this light comes on when the ignition switchis turned to the “ON” position and goes outwhen the glow plug is heated enough forengine starting.

Lighting Control Lever

65D611

Lighting Operation

60MK011

To turn the lights on or off, twist the knobon the end of the lever. There are threepositions:

OFF (1)All lights are off.

(2)Front position lights, tail lights, licenseplate light and instrument lights are on, butheadlights are off.

(3)Front position lights, tail lights, licenseplate light, instrument lights and headlightsare on.

WARNINGTo avoid possible injury, do not oper-ate controls by reaching through thesteering wheel.

(3)

(2)(1)

EXAMPLE

53

Page 65: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-43

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

60MK012

With the headlights on, push the lever for-ward to switch to the high beams (mainbeams) or pull the lever toward you toswitch to the low beams. When the highbeams (main beams) are on, a light on theinstrument panel will come on. To momen-tarily activate the high beams (mainbeams) as a passing signal, pull the leverslightly toward you and release it when youhave completed the signal.

Lights “On” reminder (if equipped)A buzzer/chime sounds to remind you toturn off the lights if they are left on whenthe ignition key is removed and the driver’sdoor is opened.

Front Fog Light Switch (if equipped)

64J058

The front fog light comes on when the foglight switch is pushed in with the positionlights, tail lights and/or the headlights areon. An indicator light above the switch willbe lit when the front fog light is on.

NOTE:In some countries the lighting operationmay be different from the above descrip-tion according to local regulations.

Headlight Leveling Switch

80JM040

Level the headlight beam according to theload condition of your vehicle by turningthis switch. The chart below shows theappropriate switch position for differentvehicle-load conditions.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

Vehicle Load Condition Switch Position

Driver only 0

Driver + 1 passenger (in front seat) 0

Driver + 4 passengers, no cargo 1

Driver + 4 passengers, cargo added 2

Driver + full cargo 3

EXAMPLE

54

Page 66: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-44

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Turn Signal Control Lever

65D611

Turn Signal OperationWith the ignition switch in the “ON” posi-tion, move the lever up or down to activatethe right or left turn signals.

Normal turn signal

60MK013

Move the lever all the way upward or down-ward to signal. When the turn is com-pleted, the signal will cancel and the leverwill return to its normal position.

Lane change signal

60MK014

Sometimes, such as when changing lanes,the steering wheel is not turned far enough

to cancel the turn signal. For convenience,you can flash the turn signal by moving thelever part way and holding it there. Thelever will return to its normal position whenyou release it.

NOTE:The turn signal and its indicator flash threetimes even if you return the lever immedi-ately after moving it.

NOTE:The turn signal and its indicator can be setwhether they flash three times after theturn signal lever is returned via the infor-mation display. Refer to “Information Dis-play” in this section.

NOTE:You can customize the setting for the num-ber of times of flashing of the turn signaland its indicator. Please ask an authorizedMARUTI SUZUKI dealer for the customiza-tion.

WARNINGTo avoid possible injury, do not oper-ate controls by reaching through thesteering wheel.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

55

Page 67: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-45

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Hazard Warning Switch

76MH0A048

Push in the hazard warning switch to acti-vate the hazard warning lights. All turn sig-nal lights and both turn signal indicatorswill flash simultaneously. To turn off thelights, push the switch again.Use the hazard warning lights to warnother traffic during emergency parking orwhen your vehicle could otherwise becomea traffic hazard.

Windshield Wiper and Washer Lever

65D611

Wiper and Washer OperationWhen the ignition switch is in the “ON”position, you can use the wiper/washerlever or switch (if equipped).

Windshield Wipers

76MH0A049

To turn the windshield wipers on, move thelever down to one of the three operatingpositions. In the “INT” position, the wipersoperate intermittently. The “INT” position isvery convenient for driving in mist or lightrain. In the “LO” position, the wipers oper-ate at a steady low speed. In the “HI” posi-tion, the wipers operate at a steady highspeed. To turn off the wipers, move thelever back to the “OFF” position.Move the lever up and hold it to the “MIST”position, the windshield wipers will turn oncontinuously at low speed.

EXAMPLE

WARNINGTo avoid possible injury, do not oper-ate controls by reaching through thesteering wheel.

EXAMPLE

56

Page 68: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-46

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Windshield Washer

76MH0A050

To spray windshield washer fluid, pull thelever toward you. The windshield wiperswill automatically turn on at low speed ifthey are not already on and the “INT” posi-tion is equipped.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer Switch (if equipped)

76MH0A051

To turn the rear wiper on, twist the rearwiper switch on the end of the lever for-ward to the “ON” position. To turn the rearwiper off, twist the switch rearward to the“OFF” position.

With the rear wiper in the “OFF” position,twist the switch rearward and hold it thereto spray window washer fluid.

With the rear wiper in the “ON” position,turn the switch forward and hold it there tospray window washer fluid.

WARNING• To prevent windshield icing in cold

weather, turn on the defroster toheat the windshield before andduring windshield washer use.

• Do not use radiator antifreeze inthe windshield washer reservoir. Itcan severely impair visibility whensprayed on the windshield, and canalso damage your vehicle’s paint.

EXAMPLE

NOTICETo help prevent damage to the wind-shield wiper and washer systemcomponents, you should take the fol-lowing precautions:• Do not continue to hold in the lever

when there is no windshieldwasher fluid being sprayed or thewasher motor can be damaged.

• Do not attempt to remove dirt froma dry windshield with the wipers oryou can damage the windshieldand the wiper blades. Always wetthe windshield with washer fluidbefore operating the wipers.

• Clear ice or packed snow from thewiper blades before using the wip-ers.

• Check the washer fluid level regu-larly. Check it often when theweather is bad.

• Only fill the washer fluid reservoir3/4 full during cold weather to allowroom for expansion if the tempera-ture falls low enough to freeze thesolution.

NOTICEClear ice or snow from the rear win-dow and rear wiper blade beforeusing the rear wiper. Accumulatedice or snow could prevent the wiperblade from moving, causing damageto the wiper motor.

Washer

Wiper

EXAMPLE

57

Page 69: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

2-47

BEFORE DRIVING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Tilt Steering Lock Lever (if equipped)

74LHT0333

(1) Lock(2) Unlock

The lock lever is located under the steeringcolumn. To adjust the steering wheel height:

1) Push down the lock lever to unlock thesteering column.

2) Adjust the steering wheel to the desiredheight and lock the steering column bypull up the lock lever.

3) Try moving the steering wheel up anddown to make sure it is securely lockedin position.

Horn

68LM240

Press the horn button of the steering wheelto sound the horn. The horn will sound withthe ignition switch in any position.

Heated Rear Window Switch (if equipped)

76MH0A052

When the rear window is misted, push thisswitch (1) to clear the window.

An indicator light will be lit when the defog-ger is on. The defogger will work onlywhen the engine is running. To turn off thedefogger, push the switch again.

NOTE:• The defogger will work only when the

engine is running.• The defogger will automatically turn off

after the defogger remains on for 15 min-utes to prevent discharging of the bat-tery.

WARNINGNever attempt to adjust the steeringwheel height while the vehicle ismoving or you could lose control ofthe vehicle.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

(1)

EXAMPLE

NOTICEThe heated rear window uses a largeamount of electricity. Be sure to turnoff after the window has becomeclear.

58

Page 70: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE Exhaust Gas Warning ......................................................... 3-1Daily Inspection Checklist .................................................. 3-1Engine Oil Consumption .................................................... 3-2Ignition Switch ..................................................................... 3-3Parking Brake Lever ........................................................... 3-4Pedal ..................................................................................... 3-5Starting the Engine ............................................................. 3-6Using the Transaxle ............................................................ 3-7Braking ................................................................................. 3-15

59

Page 71: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

3-1

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Exhaust Gas Warning

52D334

Daily Inspection ChecklistBefore Driving

60A187S

1) Make sure that windows, mirrors, lights,and reflectors are clean and unob-structed.

2) Visually check the tires for the followingpoints:

– the depth of the tread groove– abnormal wear, cracks and damage– loose wheel nuts– existence of foreign material such as

nails, stones, etc.Refer to “Tires” in “INSPECTION ANDMAINTENANCE” section for details.3) Look for fluid and oil leaks.

WARNINGAvoid breathing exhaust gases.Exhaust gases contain carbon mon-oxide, a potentially lethal gas that iscolorless and odorless. Since carbonmonoxide is difficult to detect byitself, be sure to take the followingprecautions to help prevent carbonmonoxide from entering your vehicle.• Do not leave the engine running in

garages or other confined areas.(Continued)

WARNING(Continued)• Do not park with the engine run-

ning for a long period of time, evenin an open area. If it is necessary tosit for a short time in a parked vehi-cle with the engine running, makesure the air intake selector is set to“FRESH AIR” and the fan is at highspeed.

• Avoid operating the vehicle withthe tailgate or trunk open. If it isnecessary to operate the vehiclewith the tailgate or trunk open,make sure the sunroof (if equipped)and all windows are closed, and theblower is at high speed with the airintake selector set to “FRESH AIR”.

• To allow proper operation of yourvehicle’s ventilation system, keepthe air inlet grille in front of thewindshield clear of snow, leaves, orother obstructions at all times.

• Keep the exhaust tailpipe area clearof snow and other material to helpreduce the buildup of exhaustgases under the vehicle. This isparticularly important when parkedin blizzard conditions.

• Have the exhaust system inspectedperiodically for damage and leaks.Any damage or leaks should berepaired immediately.

60

Page 72: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

3-2

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

NOTE:It is normal for water to drip from the airconditioning system after use.

4) Make sure the hood is fully closed andlatched.

5) Check the headlights, turn signal lights,brake lights and horn for proper opera-tion.

6) Adjust the seat and head restraint(if equipped).

7) Check the brake pedal and the parkingbrake lever.

8) Adjust the mirrors.9) Make sure that you and all passengers

have properly fastened your seat belts.10)Make sure that all warning lights come

on as the key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion.

11)Check all gauges.12)Make sure that the BRAKE SYSTEM

WARNING light turns off when theparking brake is released.

Once a week, or each time you fill your fueltank, perform the following under-hoodchecks:

1) Engine oil level2) Coolant level3) Brake fluid level4) Windshield washer fluid level5) Battery solution level6) Hood latch operation

Pull the hood release handle inside thevehicle. Make sure that you cannotopen the hood all the way without

releasing the secondary latch. Be sureto close the hood securely after check-ing for proper latch operation. See “Alllatches, hinges & locks” of “CHASSISAND BODY” in the “Periodic Mainte-nance Schedule” in the “INSPECTIONAND MAINTENANCE” section for lubri-cation schedule.

Once a month, or each time you fill yourfuel tank, check the tire pressure using atire pressure gauge. Also check the tirepressure of the spare tire.

Engine Oil ConsumptionIt is normal for the engine to consumesome engine oil during normal vehicleoperation.

The amount of engine oil consumeddepends on the viscosity of the oil, thequality of the oil and the conditions thevehicle is driven under.More oil is consumed during high-speeddriving and when there is frequent acceler-ation and deceleration. Under high loads,your engine also will consume more oil.A new engine also consumes more oil,since its pistons, piston rings and cylinder

walls have not yet become conditioned.New engines reach the normal level of oilconsumption only after approximately 5000km (3000 miles) driving.

Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000 km (1 Qt. per 600 miles)

When judging the amount of oil consump-tion, note that the oil may become dilutedand make it difficult to accurately judge thetrue oil level.As an example, if a vehicle is used forrepeated short trips, and consumes a nor-mal amount of oil, the dipstick may notshow any drop in the oil level at all, evenafter 1000 km (600 miles) or more of driv-ing. This is because the oil is graduallybecoming diluted with fuel or moisture,making it appear that the oil level has notchanged.You should also be aware that the dilutingingredients evaporate out when the vehicleis subsequently driven at high speeds,such as on an expressway, making itappear that oil is excessively consumedafter high-speed driving.

WARNINGMake sure the hood is fully closedand latched before driving. If it is not,it can fly up unexpectedly duringdriving, obstructing your view andresulting in an accident.

61

Page 73: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

3-3

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Ignition Switch

65D611

52KM052

The ignition switch has the following fourpositions:LOCKThis is the normal parking position. It is theonly position in which the key can beremoved.

60G033

You must push in the key to turn it to the“LOCK” position. It locks the ignition, andprevents normal use of the steering wheelafter the key is removed.

To release the steering lock, insert the keyand turn it clockwise to one of the otherpositions. If you have trouble turning thekey to unlock the steering, try turning thesteering wheel slightly to the right or leftwhile turning the key.

ACCAccessories such as the radio can oper-ate, but the engine is off.

ONThis is the normal operating position. Allelectrical systems are on.

STARTThis is the position for starting the engineusing the starter motor. The key should bereleased from this position as soon as theengine starts.

Ignition key reminder (if equipped)A buzzer sounds intermittently to remindyou to remove the ignition key if it is in theignition switch when the driver’s door isopened.

81A297S

WARNINGTo avoid possible injury, do not oper-ate controls by reaching through thesteering wheel.

EXAMPLE

Turn to “LOCK”

Push

WARNING• Never remove the ignition key

while the vehicle is moving. Thesteering wheel will lock and youwill not be able to steer the vehicle.

(Continued)

62

Page 74: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

3-4

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Parking Brake Lever

62J100

(1) To set(2) To release(3) To release

The parking brake lever is located betweenthe seats. To set the parking brake, holdthe brake pedal down and pull the parkingbrake lever all the way up. To release theparking brake, hold the brake pedal down,pull up slightly on the parking brake lever,push the button on the end of the lever withyour thumb, and lower the lever to its origi-nal position.

WARNING(Continued)• Always remove the ignition key

when leaving the vehicle even ifonly for a short time. Also do notleave children alone in a parkedvehicle. Unattended children couldcause accidental movement of thevehicle or could tamper with powerwindows or power sunroof. Theyalso could suffer from heat strokein warm or hot weather. Thesecould result in severe injury oreven death.

NOTICE• Do not use the starter motor for

more than 12 seconds at a time.For diesel engine model, do notuse the starter motor for more than30 seconds at a time. If the enginedoes not start, wait 15 secondsbefore trying again. If the enginedoes not start after severalattempts, check the fuel and igni-tion systems or consult your MAR-UTI SUZUKI dealer.

• Do not leave the ignition switch inthe “ON” position if the engine isnot running as the battery will dis-charge.

(2)

(3)

(1)EXAMPLE

WARNING• Never drive your vehicle with the

parking brake on: rear brake effec-tiveness can be reduced from over-heating, brake life may beshortened, or permanent brakedamage may result.

• If the parking brake does not holdthe vehicle securely or does notfully release, have your vehicleinspected immediately by an autho-rized MARUTI SUZUKI dealer.

WARNINGAlways set the parking brake fullybefore leaving your vehicle or it maymove, causing injury or damage.When parking, make sure the gear-shift lever is in reverse or first gear.Remember, even though thetransaxle is in gear, you must set theparking brake fully.

63

Page 75: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

3-5

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

NOTE:(For Auto Gear Shift Model)For details on how to use the gearshiftlever to park the vehicle, refer to “Parking”in “Auto Gear Shift” in this section.

Parking Brake Reminder Buzzer (if equipped)A buzzer sounds intermittently to remindyou to release the parking brake if youstart the vehicle without releasing the park-ing brake. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and the brake sys-tem warning light turns off.

PedalManual transaxle

80J2121

Auto Gear Shift

80J2122

Clutch Pedal (1) (For manual transaxle)The clutch pedal is used to disengage thedrive to the wheels when starting theengine, stopping, or shifting the gearshiftlever. Depressing the pedal disengagesthe clutch.

Brake Pedal (2)Your MARUTI SUZUKI vehicle is equippedwith front disc brakes and rear drumbrakes. Depressing the brake pedalapplies both sets of brakes.

You may hear occasional brake squealwhen you apply the brakes. This is a nor-mal condition caused by environmentalfactors such as cold, wet, snow, etc.

WARNINGWhen parking the vehicle inextremely cold weather, the followingprocedure should be used:1) Set the parking brake.2) Manual transaxle - turn off the

engine, then shift into reverse orfirst gear.Auto Gear Shift – shift into reverseor first gear and check the gearposition indicator in the instru-ment cluster to make sure that thetransaxle is engaged in 1st orreverse, then turn off the engine.

3) Get out of the vehicle and putchocks under the wheels.

4) Release the parking brake. When you return to your vehicle,you must remember to first set theparking brake, then remove thewheel chocks.

(2)(1)

(3)

EXAMPLE

(3)

(2)

EXAMPLE

WARNINGDo not drive with your foot resting onthe clutch pedal. It could result inexcessive clutch wear, clutch dam-age, or unexpected loss of enginebraking.

WARNINGIf brake squeal is excessive andoccurs each time the brakes areapplied, you should have the brakeschecked by your MARUTI SUZUKIdealer.

64

Page 76: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

3-6

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Accelerator Pedal (3)This pedal controls the speed of theengine. Depressing the accelerator pedalincreases power output and speed.

Starting the EngineBefore Starting the Engine

76MH021

1) Make sure the parking brake is set fully.2) Manual transaxle – Shift into “N” (Neu-

tral) and depress the clutch pedal all

the way to the floor. Hold the clutchpedal while starting the engine. Auto Gear Shift – Shift into “N” (Neutral)and depress the brake pedal. Hold thebrake pedal while starting the engine.

Starting a Cold and Warm Engine(For Petrol Engine Model)With your foot off the accelerator pedal,crank the engine by turning the ignition keyto “START”. Release the key when theengine starts.

If the engine does not start after 12 sec-onds of cranking, wait about 15 seconds,then press down the accelerator pedal to1/3 of its travel and try cranking the engineagain. Release the key and acceleratorpedal when the engine starts.

If the engine still does not start, try holdingthe accelerator pedal all the way to thefloor while cranking. This should clear theengine if it is flooded.

(For Diesel Engine Model)

Cold engineTurn the ignition switch to the “ON” positionand wait until the glow plug indicator goesout if it comes on. Crank the engine byturning the ignition key to “START”.Release the key when the engine starts.

Warm engineCrank the engine by turning the ignition keyto “START”. Release the key when theengine starts.

Caution when stopping the engine withturbochargerWhen stopping the engine after climbing orhigh speed driving, let the engine idle forabout one minute or more (if it is not prohib-ited) to cool down the turbocharger andengine oil. This is to prevent the engine oilfrom over-deteriorating. Deteriorated engineoil will damage the bearings of the turbo-charger.

WARNINGDo not “ride” the brakes by applyingthem continuously or resting yourfoot on the pedal. This will result inoverheating of the brakes whichcould cause unpredictable brakingaction, longer stopping distances, orpermanent brake damage.

Auto Gear Shift

WARNINGMake sure that the parking brake isset fully and the transaxle is in Neu-tral before attempting to start theengine.

NOTICE• Stop turning the starter immedi-

ately after the engine has started orthe starter system can be damaged.

• Do not crank the engine for morethan 12 seconds at a time. If theengine doesn’t start on the first try,wait about 15 seconds before try-ing again.

NOTICE• Stop turning the starter immediately

after the engine has started or thestarter system can be damaged.

• Do not crank the engine for morethan 30 seconds at a time. If theengine doesn’t start on the first try,wait about 15 seconds before tryingagain.

65

Page 77: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

3-7

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Restarting diesel engine after fuel-empty stopIf the engine stops and the low fuel warn-ing light and the malfunction indicator lightcome on, use the following procedure:1) Fill the fuel tank.2) Hold the ignition key in “ON” position for

5–10 seconds to feed fuel.3) Perform above engine starting proce-

dure to start the engine.If the malfunction indicator light still comeson after the engine started, there may besome problem with the engine. Ask yourMARUTI SUZUKI dealer to have theengine inspected.

Using the TransaxleManual Transaxle

68KH032

Starting offTo start off, depress the clutch pedal all theway to the floor and shift into 1st gear.After releasing the parking brake, gradually

release the clutch. When you hear achange in the engine’s sound, slowly pressthe accelerator while continuing to gradu-ally release the clutch.

ShiftingAll forward gears are synchronized, whichprovides for quiet and easy shifting. Alwayspush in the clutch pedal fully before shiftinggears.

Downshifting maximum allowablespeeds

For K10B Petrol engine

For E08A diesel engine

*NOTE:You may not accelerate to the maximumallowable speed because of the driving sit-uation and/or the vehicle condition.

Keep the engine speed so it does not getinto the red zone of tachometer.

Downshifting km/h

2nd to 1st 10

3rd to 2nd 37

4th to 3rd 55

5th to 4th OK at all

Downshifting km/h

2nd to 1st 29

3rd to 2nd 55

4th to 3rd 85

5th to 4th 109

NOTICEWhen downshifting to a lower gear,make sure not to downshift at thespeed faster than the maximumallowable speeds, or severe enginedamage can result.

WARNING• Reduce your speed and downshift

to a lower gear before going downa long or steep hill. A lower gearwill allow the engine to providebraking. Avoid riding the brakes orthey may overheat, resulting inbrake failure.

• When driving on slippery roads, besure to slow down before down-shifting. Excessive and or suddenchanges in engine speed maycause loss of traction, which couldcause you to lose control.

NOTICEMake sure that the vehicle is com-pletely stationary before you shiftinto reverse.

66

Page 78: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

3-8

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Auto Gear ShiftAuto Gear Shift is a 5-speed forward/reverse transaxle.Auto Gear Shift has the basic features ofconventional manual transaxle, but clutchoperation and transaxle gear shifting arecontrolled electronically.

NOTE:When you open the driver’s door, the AutoGear Shift systems run automatically andyou may hear an operating noise. Thissound does not indicate a malfunction.

The features are as follows:

76MH0A054

76MH0A055

Depress brake pedal indicator

76MH0A047

This light will come on if you do notdepress the brake pedal in the followingsituations.• When starting the engine.• When the engine is on and the gearshift

lever is shifted from “N” position to “D”,“M” or “R” position.

• When the ignition switch is in the “ON”position and the engine is off, the gear-shift lever is shifted into any position.

This light will also come on if one of thegears cannot be engaged and the systemis unable to re-try shifting when you shiftthe gearshift lever from “N” position to “D”,“M” or “R” position.

Starting the engineWhen starting the engine, always place thegearshift lever in the “N” position anddepress the brake pedal firmly. The enginecannot be started unless the gearshiftlever is in the “N” position and the brakepedal is depressed.

76MH0A056

Clutch operationYou can select either the Drive (D) mode orthe Manual (M) mode. Since this vehiclecontrols clutch operation electronically ineither mode, you do not need to operatethe clutch.

NOTICE• To help avoid clutch damage, do

not use the clutch pedal as a foot-rest while driving or use the clutchto keep the vehicle stationary on aslope. Depress the clutch fullywhen shifting.

• When shifting or starting off, do notrace the engine. Racing the enginecan shorten engine life and affectsmooth shifting.

NOTICEDo not depress both the brake pedaland accelerator pedal simultane-ously. This can cause damage oroverheating to the clutch.

R

N

D

-M+

R

N

D

-M+

R

N

D

-M+

67

Page 79: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

3-9

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Creeping functionThis vehicle has a creeping function thathelps the vehicle to start smoothly byengaging the clutch. When the gearshiftlever is in any of the positions “D”, “M” or“R”, and you release your foot from thebrake pedal, the vehicle starts slowly with-out depressing the accelerator pedal. Thecreeping function is disabled if you depressthe brake pedal or pull up the parkingbrake lever.

NOTE:If the driver’s door is opened and/or theparking brake lever is engaged with thegear in the “M”, “D” or “R” position, thecreeping function will not operate.

Parking and Stopping the vehicleAuto Gear Shift does not have a parkingposition. The vehicle can be parked withthe gearshift lever in any position. Whenstopping the vehicle, the gear will beshifted to 1st.

Drive (D) modeWhen the Drive (D) mode is activated, themost appropriate gear position is automati-cally selected upon operation of the accel-erator pedal and variation of vehicle speed.

Normal driving:1) Start the engine as instructed in “Start-

ing the engine” in this section.2) With your foot on the brake pedal, shift

the gearshift lever to the “D” position.When the gearshift lever is shifted tothe “D” position, the gear will be shiftedto 1st.

76MH0A057

NOTE:• If 1st gear cannot be engaged even

though the gearshift lever has beenshifted from the “N” to the “D” position,the system will re-try shifting automati-cally. This will take some time, noisemay be heard from the gears, and shift-ing gear shock may occur. However,they do not indicate a malfunction.

• The “N” indicator will flash, the depressbrake pedal indicator will come on and awarning buzzer (long pulse sound) willsound if any of the following casesoccur;– If you shift the gearshift lever from the

“N” to the “D” position without depress-ing the brake pedal

– If the system is unable to re-try shiftingYou should depress the brake pedal andshift the gearshift lever to “N” position,then shift to “D” again.

3) Release the parking brake and brakepedal.

4) Depress the accelerator pedal slowly.

NOTICEA buzzer will sound continuously ifthe vehicle is operated with the gear-shift lever in-between of each shiftpositions. The vehicle will becomeinoperative if you continue to operatethe vehicle with the gearshift lever in-between shift positions.

WARNING• While driving the vehicle, do not

shift the gearshift lever to the “N”position. The engine brake may notwork and you may get involved inan unexpected accident. If youreturn the gearshift lever from “N”to “D” because of unintended shift-ing, the gear position will be shiftedaccording to the current vehiclespeed.

• Always keep your foot on the brakepedal while stopped with theengine running. This operation pre-vents the vehicle from moving dueto unintended activation of thecreeping function.

68

Page 80: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

3-10

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Starting off on an uphill/downhill:

Uphill1) Apply the parking brake firmly so that the

vehicle does not roll backwards.2) Shift the gearshift lever to the “D” posi-

tion while depressing the brake pedal.Make sure that the gear position indica-tor in the instrumental cluster displays1st gear.

3) Release the brake pedal and depressthe accelerator pedal gradually, andwhen the vehicle starts to move, releasethe parking brake and depress the accel-erator pedal to start off.

Downhill1) Depress the brake pedal and shift the

gearshift lever to the “D” position. Makesure that the gear is in 1st by checkingthe gear position indicator.

2) Release the brake pedal and depressthe accelerator pedal slowly. Even if theaccelerator pedal is not depressed, theclutch will be engaged when the vehiclespeed increases.

Using engine braking:When driving on a downhill slope, down-shifting is recommended. So you can useengine braking.By placing the gearshift lever in the “M”position, the Manual (M) mode is selected,and you can shift to a lower gear manually.For details of downshift operation, refer to“Upshift and downshift” in the “Manual (M)mode”.

Manual (M) modeThe gears are not shifted automatically. Toshift the transaxle, the driver must operatethe gearshift lever to the “+” or “–” direc-tion. As for conventional manual transaxlevehicles, releasing the accelerator pedal alittle may help the transaxle to shiftsmoothly.

Upshift and downshift:

Upshifting

76MH0A058

NOTICEIf the gearshift lever cannot shift intoany position, or the gear is changedto “N” position automatically whenthe vehicle speed becomes less than10 km/h (6 mph), there may be a sys-tematic malfunction. In this case, askyour MARUTI SUZUKI dealer toinspect the Auto Gear Shift system assoon as possible.

NOTICEDo not operate the system asdescribed below. The life cycle of theclutch may be reduced.• Using the accelerator pedal to hold

the vehicle on an uphill slope withthe gearshift lever in the “D” or “M”position. If you perform this opera-tion for a certain period of time, awarning buzzer will sound.

• Shifting the gearshift lever to the“D”, “M” or “R” position while rac-ing the engine.

• Driving at low speed using a highgear.

• Holding the vehicle on an uphillslope using the creeping function.If you perform this operation for acertain period of time, a warningbuzzer will sound.

NOTICEOn an uphill slope, never hold thevehicle at a stop using only the accel-erator pedal or the creeping function.If you perform this operation for acertain period of time, a warningbuzzer will sound, and in some casesthe engine will stall. This can alsocause excessive damage to theclutch. R

N

D

-M+

69

Page 81: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

3-11

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Pull the gearshift lever to the “+” directionand release it. Every time the lever is oper-ated, the transaxle is upshifting 1 step inthe order of 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5thgear.

76MH0A059

Downshifting

76MH0A060

Push the gearshift lever to the “–” directionand release it. Every time the lever is oper-ated, the transaxle is downshifted in theorder 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st gear.

76MH0A061

The gear position is displayed on the gearposition indicator. The gear position indica-tor shows the transaxle gear position.Before starting off, always check the gearposition indicator to make sure that thetransaxle is engaged in 1st or reverse, thendepress the accelerator pedal.

NOTE:• To downshift smoothly, the engine runs

fast in some cases. This is done inten-tionally by the system and is not a mal-function.

• When driving down a hill, downshift anduse the engine braking appropriately. Ifnecessary, continuous downshifting ispossible. However, if downshifting morethan 3 steps, gear shifting will take moretime.

• When the gear is shifting, a noise can beheard in some case. This is not a mal-function.

R

N

D

-M+

WARNING• Be careful when accelerating,

upshifting, downshifting or brakingon a slippery surface. Suddenacceleration or engine brakingcould cause the vehicle to spin orskid.

• To drive down a long or steep hill,reduce your speed and downshift.Remember, if you ride the brakesexcessively, they may overheat andfail.

• While driving the vehicle, do notshift the gearshift lever to “N” posi-tion. The engine brake may notwork and you may get involved inan unexpected accident. If youreturn the gearshift lever from “N”to “M” because of unintended shift-ing, the gear position will be shiftedaccording to the current vehiclespeed.

• Do not apply the parking brakewhile driving. Otherwise, it couldcause a skid and you may getinvolved in an unexpected acci-dent.

70

Page 82: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

3-12

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Starting off:1) Start the engine as instructed in “Start-

ing the engine” in this section.2) With your foot on the brake pedal, shift

the gearshift lever to the “M” position.When the gearshift lever is shifted tothe “M” position, the gear will be shiftedto 1st. Before starting off, always makesure that the intended gear is engagedby checking the gear position indicator,then depress the accelerator pedal.

NOTE:• If 1st gear cannot be engaged even

though the gearshift lever has beenshifted from the “N” to the “M” position,the system will re-try shifting automati-cally. This will take some time, noisemay be heard from the gears, and shift-ing gear shock may occur. However,they do not indicate a malfunction.

• The “N” indicator will flash, the depressbrake pedal indicator will come on and awarning buzzer (long pulse sound) willsound if any of the following casesoccur;– If you shift the gearshift lever from the

“N” to the “M” position withoutdepressing the brake pedal

– If the system is unable to re-try shiftingYou should depress the brake pedal andshift the gearshift lever to “N” position,then shift to “M” position again a fewseconds later.

3) Release the parking brake and brakepedal. Depress the accelerator pedalslowly for smooth starting.

NOTICE• If the gearshift lever cannot shift

into any position, or the gear ischanged to “N” position automati-cally when the vehicle speedbecomes less than 10 km/h (6 mph),there may be a systematic malfunc-tion. In this case, ask your MARUTISUZUKI dealer to inspect the AutoGear Shift system as soon as possi-ble.

• The manual (M) mode does notupshift even if the engine speedreaches the rev-limit.

• The system will not allow shifting upor down to a gear that would causeengine over-revving or under-rev-ving.

• If frequently driving at low speedusing a high gear position, the lifecycle of the clutch may be reduced.

• Frequent downshifting (more than 3positions consecutively) causes thereduction of transaxle life.

WARNINGAlways keep your foot on the brakepedal or pull up the parking leverwhile stopped with the engine run-ning. These operations prevent thevehicle from starting due to unin-tended activation of the creepingfunction.

NOTICEDo not operate the system asdescribed below. The life cycle of theclutch may be reduced.• Using the accelerator pedal to hold

the vehicle on an uphill slope oper-ation with the gearshift lever in the“M” or “D” position. If you performthis operation for a certain periodof time, a warning buzzer willsound.

• Shifting the gearshift lever to the“M”, “D” or “R” position while rac-ing the engine.

• Driving at low speed using a highgear.

• Stopping on a slope using thecreeping function. If you performthis operation for a certain periodof time, a warning buzzer willsound.

71

Page 83: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

3-13

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Starting off on an uphill/downhill slope:

Uphill1) Apply the parking brake firmly so that

the vehicle does not roll backwards.2) Shift the gearshift lever to the “M” posi-

tion while depressing the brake pedal.Make sure that the gear position indica-tor in the instrumental cluster displays1st gear.

3) Release the brake pedal and depressthe accelerator pedal gradually, andwhen the vehicle starts to move,release the parking brake and depressthe accelerator pedal to start off.

Downhill1) Depress the brake pedal and shift the

gearshift lever to the “M” position.Check the gear position indicator tomake sure that the gear is in 1st.

2) Release the brake pedal and depressthe accelerator pedal slowly. Eventhough the accelerator pedal is notdepressed, the clutch will be engagedwhen the vehicle speed increases.

Backing upAfter the vehicle has stopped completely,depress the brake pedal and shift the gear-shift lever to the “R” position. Depress theaccelerator pedal slowly as when startingoff in 1st gear. Before backing up, makesure that reverse gear is selected bychecking the gear position indicator.

76MH0A062

NOTE:• If reverse gear cannot be engaged even

though the gearshift lever has beenshifted from the “N” to the “R” position,the system will re-try shifting automati-cally. This will take some time, noisemay be heard from the gears, and shift-ing gear shock may occur. However,they do not indicate a malfunction.

• The “N” indicator will flash, the depressbrake pedal indicator will come on and awarning buzzer (long pulse sound) willsound if any of the following casesoccur;– If you shift the gearshift lever from the

“N” to the “R” position without depress-ing the brake pedal

– If the system is unable to re-try shiftingYou should depress the brake pedal andshift the gearshift lever to “N” position,

then shift to “R” position again a few sec-onds later.

• The system will not allow shifting to the“R” position if the vehicle speed is overabout 3 km/h (2 mph). If the gearshiftlever is operated under this condition,the “N” indicator in the instrument clusterwill blink. However, when the vehiclespeed drops below about 3 km/h (2mph), the gear will be shifted to reverse.Make sure that the vehicle has stoppedcompletely before shifting to the “R”position.

StoppingThe vehicle can be stopped by depressingthe brake pedal regardless of the gearposition. This is because the clutch is auto-matically disengaged to prevent the enginefrom stopping. • If the gearshift lever is in the “D” position,

the gear will be downshifted to 1st whenthe vehicle stops.

NOTICEOn an uphill slope, never hold thevehicle at a stop using only the accel-erator pedal or creeping function. Ifyou perform this operation for a cer-tain period of time, a warning buzzerwill sound, and in some cases theengine will stall. This can also causeexcessive damage to the clutch.

NOTICEOn a downhill slope, never hold thevehicle at a stop using only the accel-erator pedal or the creeping function.If you perform this operation for acertain period of time, a warningbuzzer will sound, and in some casesthe engine will stall. This can alsocause excessive damage to theclutch.

72

Page 84: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

3-14

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

• If the gearshift lever is in the “M” posi-tion, the gear will be downshifted to 1stwhen the vehicle stops.

ParkingUnlike an automatic transaxle, Auto GearShift does not have a parking position. Thevehicle can be parked with the gearshiftlever in any position.1) Apply the parking brake firmly.2) While depressing the brake pedal, shift

the gearshift lever to the “R” position ona downhill slope, and to the 1st positionin the drive (D) mode or the “M(1)” posi-tion in the manual (M) mode on anuphill slope and confirm the gear posi-tion by checking the gear position indi-cator.

3) Stop the engine.

NOTE:• After the engine is stopped, the gear in

the transaxle does not change even ifyou shift the gearshift lever in any posi-tion. Always shift the gearshift leverbefore stop the engine.

• Check the transaxle gear position bylooking at the gear position indicator,then turn the ignition switch off to stopthe engine. Release the brake pedalafter a few seconds. The gearshift leverwill be locked in the position it was inwhen the ignition switch was turned off.

Parking cancelDepress the brake pedal, turn the ignitionswitch to the “ON” position, and shift thegearshift lever to the “N” position. The gearwill be disengaged.

WARNING• When stopping, for example, at a

traffic light, be sure to depress thebrake pedal firmly. For your safety,apply the parking brake, too, whenstopping on a hill.

• When racing the engine, make surethat the gear is in the “N” positionby checking the gear position indi-cator. If the accelerator is operatedwith the gear in any other position,the vehicle may move resulting inan unexpected accident.

• Do not leave your vehicle unat-tended while the engine is running.

• When leaving the vehicle, stop theengine and park the vehicle with agear engaged. If you need to leavethe vehicle with the engine running,apply the parking brakes firmly,and shift the gearshift lever to the“N” position. Otherwise, the vehi-cle may move unexpectedly andmay cause an accident.

NOTICE• On a slope, never hold the vehicle

at a stop using only the acceleratorpedal or the creeping function. Ifyou perform this operation for acertain period of time, a warningbuzzer will sound, and in somecases the engine will stall. This canalso cause excessive damage tothe clutch.

• If the gearshift lever is operatedmore than necessary, the systemmay not allow operation of thegearshift lever for a certain periodof time, and the gear may not beshifted appropriately. Therefore, donot operate the gearshift lever if notnecessary.

WARNING• If the gear is not engaged properly

and completely before the ignitionswitch is turned off, the vehiclemay not be parked with the gearengaged. Always confirm the gearposition by checking the gear posi-tion indicator when parking.

• On a downhill slope, the gearshould be put in reverse, and in 1stgear on an uphill slope. Otherwise,the vehicle may move, and causean unexpected accident. If the gearis left in the “N” position, the vehi-cle cannot be parked with a gearengaged.

73

Page 85: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

3-15

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Warning functionsA warning buzzer will sound or the indica-tor will blink under the following conditions.

Warning buzzer• The clutch is heated due to excessive

load.• The creeping function is being activated

for a long period of time.

• The ignition switch is turned to the“LOCK” position with the gear in 2nd,3rd, 4th or 5th. In this case, turn the igni-tion switch to the “ON” position and shiftthe gearshift lever in the “N” position,shift it to the “D” or “M” or “R” position,then turn the ignition switch to “LOCK”.

• During a stop, the driver’s door isopened with the gearshift lever in the“R”, “D” or “M” position while the engineis running.

“N” indicator blinkingWhen the gear indicator lamp blinks “N”,you should depress the brake pedal andshift the gearshift lever to “N” position.

“1st” indicator blinking

When the gear indicator lamp blinks “1st”,you should depress the brake pedal andshift the gearshift lever to “N” position, thenshift to “D” or “M” position again a few sec-onds later.

“R” indicator blinkingWhen the gear indicator lamp blinks “R”,you should depress the brake pedal andshift the gearshift lever to “N” position, thenshift to “R” position again a few secondslater.

Braking

60G165S

The distance needed to bring any vehicleto a halt increases with the speed of thevehicle. The braking distance needed, forexample, at 60 km/h (37 mph) will beapproximately 4 times greater than thebraking distance needed at 30 km/h (19mph). Start to brake the vehicle when thereis plenty of distance between your vehicle

and the stopping point, and slow downgradually.

Power-Assisted BrakesYour vehicle has power-assisted brakes. Ifpower assistance is lost due to a stalledengine or other failures, the system is stillfully operational on reserve power and youcan bring the vehicle to a complete stop bypressing the brake pedal once and holdingit down. The reserve power is partly usedup when you depress the brake pedal andreduces each time the pedal is pressed.Apply smooth and even pressure to thepedal. Do not pump the pedal.

NOTICEIn the above cases, pull over to theside of the road and stop the engine,and then ask your MARUTI SUZUKIdealer to inspect your vehicle. Other-wise, the clutch disc may be dam-aged.

EXAMPLE

WARNINGIf water gets into the brake drums,brake performance may become poorand unpredictable. After driving through water or washingthe underside of the vehicle, test thebrakes while driving at a slow speedto see if they have maintained theirnormal effectiveness. If the brakes areless effective than normal, dry themby repeatedly applying the brakeswhile driving slowly until the brakeshave regained their normal effective-ness.

74

Page 86: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

3-16

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Brake Assist System (if equipped)When you slam the brakes on, the brakeassist system judges as an emergencystop and provides more powerful brakingfor a driver who cannot hold down thebrake pedal firmly.

NOTE:If you quickly and forcefully depress thebrakes, you may hear a clicking sound inthe brake pedal. This is normal and indi-cates that the brake assist system is acti-vated properly.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) (if equipped)ABS will help you avoid skidding by elec-tronically controlling braking pressure. Itwill also help you maintain steering controlwhen braking on slippery surfaces or whenbraking hard.The ABS works automatically, so you donot need any special braking technique.Just push the brake pedal down withoutpumping. The ABS will operate whenever itsenses that the wheels are locking up. You

may feel the brake pedal moves a littlewhile the ABS is operating.

NOTE:The ABS will not work if vehicle speed isunder about 10 km/h (6 mph).

63J081

(1) ABS warning light(2) Brake system warning light

WARNINGEven without reserve power in thebrake system, you can still stop thevehicle by pressing the brake pedalharder than normally required. How-ever, the stopping distance may belonger.

WARNING• On some types of loose surfaces

(such as gravel, snow-coveredroads, etc.) the stopping distancerequired for an ABS-equipped vehi-cle may be slightly greater than fora comparable vehicle with a con-ventional brake system. With a con-ventional brake system, skiddingtires are able to “plow” the gravelor snow layer, shortening the stop-ping distance, ABS minimizes thisresistance effect. Allow for extrastopping distance when driving onloose surfaces.

• On regular paved roads, some driv-ers may be able to obtain slightlyshorter stopping distances withconventional brake systems thanwith ABS.

• In both of the above conditions,ABS will still offer the advantage ofhelping you maintain directionalcontrol. However, remember thatABS will not compensate for badroad or weather conditions or poordriver judgment. Use good judg-ment and do not drive faster thanconditions will safely allow.

WARNING• If the ABS warning light (1) on the

instrument panel comes on andstays on while driving, there maybe a problem with the ABS system.Ask your MARUTI SUZUKI dealer toinspect the ABS system immedi-ately. If the ABS system becomesinoperative, the brake system willfunction as an ordinary brake sys-tem that has no ABS.

(Continued)

(1)(2)

75

Page 87: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

3-17

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

How the ABS WorksA computer continuously monitors wheelspeed. The computer compares thechanges in wheel speed when braking. Ifthe wheels slow suddenly, indicating askidding situation, the computer willchange braking pressure several timeseach second to prevent the wheels fromlocking. When you start your vehicle after astop you may hear a momentary motornoise as the system checks itself.

WARNING(Continued)• If the ABS warning light (1) and the

Brake system warning light (2) onthe instrument panel simultane-ously stays on or comes on whendriving, both anti-lock function andrear brake force control function(proportioning valve function) ofthe ABS system may have failed. Ifso, the rear wheels may easily skidor the vehicle can even spin in theworst case when braking on a slip-pery road or when hard brakingeven on a dry paved road. Ask yourMARUTI SUZUKI dealer to inspectthe ABS system immediately. Drivecarefully, avoiding hard braking asmuch as possible.

WARNINGThe ABS may not work properly iftires or wheels other than thosespecified in the owner’s manual areused. This is because the ABS worksby comparing changes in wheelspeed. When replacing tires orwheels, use only the size and typespecified in this owner’s manual.

76

Page 88: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

DRIVING TIPS

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

DRIVING TIPS Running-in ........................................................................... 4-1Catalytic Converter ............................................................. 4-1Improving Fuel Economy ................................................... 4-2Highway Driving .................................................................. 4-3Driving on Hills .................................................................... 4-3Driving on Slippery Roads ................................................. 4-3Driving on Wet Roads...........................................................4-4Do’s and Dont’s for Safe Driving.........................................4-5Margin for Safety...................................................................4-7

77

Page 89: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

4-1

DRIVING TIPS

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

52D078S

Running-in Catalytic Converter

80G106

The purpose of the catalytic converter is tominimize the amount of harmful pollutantsin your vehicle’s exhaust. Use of leadedfuel in vehicles equipped with catalyticconverters is prohibited, because leaddeactivates the pollutant-reducing compo-nents of the catalyst system.

The converter is designed to last the life ofthe vehicle under normal usage and whenunleaded fuel is used. No special mainte-nance is required on the converter. How-ever, it is very important to keep the engineproperly tuned. Engine misfiring, whichcan result from an improperly tunedengine, may cause overheating of the cat-alyst. This may result in permanent heatdamage to the catalyst and other vehiclecomponents.

WARNING• Wear Your Seat Belts at All Times.

Even though air bags are equippedat the front seating positions, thedriver and all passengers shouldbe properly restrained at all times,using the seat belts provided. Referto the “Seat Belts and ChildRestraint Systems” section forinstructions on proper use of theseat belts.

• Never drive while under the influ-ence of alcohol or other drugs.Alcohol and drugs can seriouslyimpair your ability to drive safely,greatly increasing the risk of injuryto yourself and others. You shouldalso avoid driving when you aretired, sick, irritated, or understress.

NOTICEThe future performance and reliabil-ity of the engine depends on the careand restraint exercised during itsearly life. It is especially important toobserve the following precautionsduring the initial 960 km (600 miles)of vehicle operation.• After starting, do not race the

engine. Warm it up gradually.• Avoid prolonged vehicle operation

at a constant speed. Moving partswill break in better if you vary yourspeed.

• Start off from a stop slowly. Avoidfull throttle starts.

• Avoid hard braking, especiallyduring the first 320 km (200 miles)of driving.

• Do not drive slowly with thetransaxle in a high gear.

• Drive the vehicle at moderateengine speeds.

• Do not tow a trailer during the first960 km (600 miles) of vehicle oper-ation.

78

Page 90: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

4-2

DRIVING TIPS

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

54G584S

Improving Fuel EconomyThe following instructions will help youimprove fuel economy.

Avoid excessive idlingIf you are to wait for more than a minutewhile you are parked, stop the engine andstart it again later. When warming up acold engine, do not allow the engine to idleor apply full throttle until the engine hasreached operating temperature. Allow theengine to warm up by driving.

Avoid “fast” startsFast starts away from lights or stop signswill consume fuel unnecessarily andshorten engine life. Start off slowly.

Avoid unnecessary stopsAvoid unnecessary deceleration and stop-ping. Try to maintain a slow, steady speedwhenever possible. Slowing down and thenaccelerating again uses more fuel.

Keep a steady cruising speedKeep as constant a speed as road and traf-fic conditions will permit.

Keep the air cleaner clean

60A183S

If the air cleaner is clogged with dust, therewill be greater intake resistance, resultingin decreased power output and increasedfuel consumption.

NOTICETo avoid damaging catalyst or othervehicle damage:• Maintain the engine in the proper

operating condition.• In the event of an engine malfunc-

tion, particularly one involvingengine misfiring or other apparentloss of performance, have the vehi-cle serviced promptly.

• Do not turn off the engine or inter-rupt the ignition when the transaxleis in gear and the vehicle is inmotion.

• Do not try to start the engine bypushing or towing the vehicle, orcoasting down a hill.

• Do not idle the engine with anyspark plug wires disconnected orremoved, such as during diagnos-tic testing.

• Do not idle the vehicle for pro-longed periods if idling seemsrough or there are other malfunc-tions.

• Do not allow the fuel tank to getnear the empty level.

• Avoid driving your vehicle atexcessively high engine speed inor around the red zone of thetachometer (if equipped).

WARNINGBe careful in areas where you parkand drive; the catalytic converter andother exhaust components can getvery hot. As with any vehicle, do notpark or operate this vehicle in areaswhere combustible materials such asdry grass or leaves can come in con-tact with a hot exhaust system.

EXAMPLE

79

Page 91: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

4-3

DRIVING TIPS

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Keep weight to a minimumThe heavier the load, the more fuel thevehicle consumes. Take out any luggageor cargo when it is not necessary.

Keep tire pressures correctUnderinflation of the tires can waste fueldue to increased running resistance of thetires. Keep your tires inflated to the correctpressure shown on the label on the driver’sside door or the driver’s door lock pillar.

Highway DrivingWhen driving at highway speeds, payattention to the following:• Stopping distance progressively

increases with vehicle speed. Apply thebrakes far enough ahead of the stoppingpoint to allow for the extra stopping dis-tance.

• On rainy days, “Hydroplaning” can occur.“Hydroplaning” is the loss of direct con-tact between the road surface and thevehicle’s tires due to a water film formingbetween them. Steering or braking thevehicle while “Hydroplaning” can be verydifficult, and loss of control can occur.Keep speed down when the road surfaceis wet.

• At high speeds, the vehicle may beaffected by side winds. Therefore,reduce speed and be prepared for unex-pected buffeting, which can occur at theexits of tunnels, when passing by a cut ofa hill, or when being overtaken by largevehicles, etc.

Driving on Hills

76MH0A063

• When climbing steep hills, the vehiclemay begin to slow down and show a lackof power. If this happens, you shouldshift to a lower gear so that the enginewill again be operating in its normalpower range. Shift rapidly to prevent thevehicle from losing momentum.

• When driving down a hill, the engineshould be used for braking by shiftinginto a lower gear.

Driving on Slippery Roads

60G089S

Under wet road conditions you shoulddrive at a lower speed than on dry roadsdue to possible slippage of tires duringbraking. When driving on icy, snow-cov-ered, or muddy roads, reduce your speedand avoid sudden acceleration, abruptbraking, or sharp steering movements.

Tire Chains (if equipped)Tire chains should only be used if they areneeded to increase traction or are requiredby law. Make sure that the chains you use

WARNINGTry not to hold the brake pedal downtoo long or too often while goingdown a steep or long hill. This couldcause the brakes to overheat, result-ing in reduced braking efficiency.Failure to take this precaution couldresult in loss of vehicle control.

R

N

D

-M+

NOTICEWhen descending a down hill,NEVER turn the ignition key to the“LOCK” position. Emission controlsystem damage may result.

80

Page 92: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

4-4

DRIVING TIPS

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

are the correct size for your vehicle’s tires.Also make sure that there is enough clear-ance between the fenders and the chainsas installed on the tires.

Install the chains on the front tires tightly,according to the chain manufacturer’sinstructions. Retighten the chains afterdriving about 1.0 km (1/2 mile) if neces-sary. With the chains installed, drive slowly.

If Your Vehicle Gets StuckIf your vehicle gets stuck in snow, mud, orsand, follow the directions below:

1) Shift the transaxle back and forthbetween a forward range (or first gear formanual transaxle) and reverse. This willcreate a rocking motion which may giveyou enough momentum to free the vehi-cle. Press gently on the accelerator tokeep wheel spinning to a minimumwheel rpm. Remove your foot from theaccelerator while shifting. Do not race the engine. Excessive wheelspin will cause the tires to dig deeper,making it more difficult to free the vehi-cle.

2) If your vehicle remains stuck after a fewminutes of rocking, get another vehicleto pull your vehicle out.

54G638S

DRIVING ON WET ROADS

NOTICE• If you hear the chains hitting against

the vehicle body while driving, stopand tighten them.

• If your vehicle is equipped with fullwheel caps, remove the wheel capsbefore installing the chains or thewheel caps can be damaged by thechain bands.

WARNINGDo not allow anyone to stand nearthe vehicle when you are rocking it,and do not spin the wheels fasterthan an indicated 40 km/h (25 mph)on the speedometer. Personal injuryand/ or vehicle damage may resultfrom spinning the wheels too fast.

NOTICEDo not continue rocking the vehiclefor more than a few minutes. Pro-longed rocking can cause engineoverheating or transaxle damage.

NOTICE• When driving on wet roads, avoid

driving through large amount ofstanding water on the road. Largeamount of water entering theengine compartment may causedamage to the engine and or elec-trical components.

• If stuck in deep water, do not starttill water level drops.

• Water is incompressible substance,water inside engine is harmful tothe engine.

WARNINGIn addition to following the drivingtips in this section, it is important toobserve the following precautions. • Make sure your tires are in good

condition and always maintain thespecified tire pressure. Refer to“Tires” in the “INSPECTIONANDMAINTENANCE”

• Di not use tires other than thosespecified by MARUTI SUZUKI.Neveruse different sizes or types of tireson the front and rear wheels. Forinformation regarding the specifiedtires, refer to the Tire InformationLabel located on the driver’s doorlock pillar

(Continued)

81

Page 93: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

4-5

DRIVING TIPS

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Do’s and Dont’s for Safe DrivingExercise care in handling your vehicle. Beconscious of not only your own safety butalso the safety of others on the road, andthus enjoy the best and most comfortabledriving experience.

This section contains basic rules for safedriving. Read it carefully for good under-standing of the content so that you canenjoy safe and pleasant driving in yourMaruti Suzuki vehicle.

72F-08-002

Starting1) Adjust the driver’s seat for the proper

driving posture.2) Adjust the rear view mirror so as to

obtain the best possible rear view.3) Before moving off, look forward and

back to confirm safety.4) Don’t start quickly, since it is dangerous

and wastes fuel.

General driving1) Be sure to stop before the stop light and

stop sign. When moving into the inter-section without any traffic lights orsigns, drive slowly to confirm safety.

72F-08-002

2) Always follow other vehicles at a safedistance in order to prevent a rear-endcollision, in case the vehicle aheadmake a sudden stop.

3) Turn ON the turn signal at least 30meters before making a turn or chang-ing the lane so as not to be hit frombehind.

4) Before entering a corner, decelerate toa safe speed. Don’t apply brakes duringcornering, or a cornering skid mayoccur.

5) When overtaking other vehicles, watchout for the oncoming vehicle and care-fully confirm the safety.

6) Don’t attempt zigzag driving which willhinder your control over the vehicle andcause an accident.

WARNING(Continued)• Never use oversized tires or special

shock absorbers and springs toraise (jack up) your vehicle. Thiswill change the handling character-istics. Oversized tires may also rubagainst the fender over bumps,causing vehicle damage or tire fail-ure.

• After driving through water, test thebrakes while driving at a slowspeed to see if they have main-tained their normal effectiveness. Ifthe brakes are less effective thannormal, dry them by repeatedlyapplying the brakes while drivingslowly until the brakes haveregained their normal effectiveness.

82

Page 94: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

4-6

DRIVING TIPS

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

72F-08-011

Braking1) Use the parking brake when parking

your vehicle and shift the gear shiftlever into the first gear or reverse gearposition for the sake of safety.

2) Don’t use hand-braking unless unavoid-able. It causes the vehicle to skid and arear-end collision occur. It is especiallydangerous when the tyres are worn, forthey allow a larger skid.

72F-08-012

Use foot brake in three stages1. Warn the vehicle behind you2. Gradually apply the brake.3. Bring the vehicle to a halt.

3) When driving on a downhill, try not toapply the brake but use the enginebrake effectively. Overuse of thefoot-brake may result in total brake fail-ure.

4) Avoid reckless high speed driving andtry to drive at a safe speed suitable forthe road conditions while maintaining aconstant speed.

72F-08-015

5) The higher the speed, the narrower thedriver’s visual range becomes. In sucha state, it is difficult to anticipate anyhazard and the driver feels muchfatigued.

6) Never do sharp handling during highspeed driving. You will lose your controlover your vehicle.

7) When overtaking or changing the lanewhile driving at a high speed, keep anample vehicle-to-vehicle distance.

83

Page 95: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

4-7

DRIVING TIPS

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Long distance driving1) Be sure to perform safety checks before

starting a trip.2) Take rest at certain intervals to prevent

an accident which may occur when youare sleepy or tired.

72F-08-020

Night time driving1) Drive more slowly at night than in the

daytime, for the visual range isrestricted at night.

2) Don’t overtake other vehicles at night.Darkness bothers your sense of speedand hinders your judgment on the vehi-cle-to-vehicle distance.

3) Don’t use the high headlight beamunless its use is inevitable. Its dazzlemay blitz the driver of the oncomingvehicle, thus causing an accident.

4) Always keep the window glasses clean.Don’t operate the windshield wiper

when the windshield glass is dry or thewiper blade and glass may get dam-aged.

72F-08-021

72F-08-022

Margin For SafetyIt is important to allow yourself a margin forsafety during driving so that you can copewith erroneous or unexpected driving ofother drivers. For that, observe the follow-ing.

• Drive at a safe speed.• Maintain a sufficient distance between

your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.• Don’t force yourself to overtake other

vehicles.• Don’t make quick start, hard steering or

sudden stops.• Allow an ample time in the driving

schedule.• Observe traffic rules and regulations.

ConclusionA perfect driver does not exist. Theendeavor of every motorist should be tostrive for perfection. Safety consciousnessnot only ensures your safety and the safetyof other road users, it also helps reducethe wear and tear on your vehicle, prolongsits life, gives more mileage and ensures acomfortable driving experience.Follow the do’s and don’ts listed, anddriving will never be the same again.

84

Page 96: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT Fuel Filler Cap ..................................................................... 5-1Engine Hood ........................................................................ 5-2Sun Visor ............................................................................. 5-3Interior Light ........................................................................ 5-4Accessory Socket ............................................................... 5-5AUX/USB Socket (if equipped) ........................................... 5-5Assist Grips (if equipped) .................................................. 5-5Glove Box ............................................................................ 5-6Cup Holder and Storage Area ............................................ 5-6Floor Mats (if equipped) ..................................................... 5-7Luggage Compartment Hooks ........................................... 5-8Luggage Compartment Cover (if equipped) ..................... 5-8Frame Hooks ....................................................................... 5-9Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System ................. 5-10Radio Antenna ..................................................................... 5-13Audio System (if equipped) ................................................ 5-14

85

Page 97: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-1

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Fuel Filler Cap

76MH0A064

74LHT0511

The fuel filler cap is located on the left rearside of the vehicle. The fuel filler door canbe unlocked by pulling up the opener leverlocated on the outboard side of the driver’sseat and locked by simply closing the door.

68KN048

To remove the fuel filler cap:1) Open the fuel filler door.2) Remove the cap by turning it counter-

clockwise.

76MH0A065

NOTE:If the cap holder (1) is equipped with thefuel filler door, hold the fuel filler cap whenrefueling.

To reinstall the fuel filler cap:1) Turn the cap clockwise until you hear

several clicks.2) Close the fuel filler door.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

CAUTIONRemove the fuel filler cap slowly. Thefuel may be under pressure and mayspray out, causing injury.

Open Close

EXAMPLE

WARNINGFuel is extremely flammable. Do notsmoke when refueling, and makesure there are no open flames orsparks in the area.

(1)

EXAMPLE

86

Page 98: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-2

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Engine Hood

76MH0A066

To open the engine hood:1) Pull the hood release handle located on

the outboard side of the driver’s side.This will disengage the engine hoodlock halfway.

76MH0A067

2) Push the under-hood release lever upwith your finger, as shown in the illustra-tion. While pushing the lever, lift up theengine hood.

76MH0A068

3) While holding the hood, pull the proprod out from the holding clip, then insertthe end of the rod into the designatedhole in the hood.

WARNINGIf you need to replace the fuel cap,use a Maruti genuine cap. Use of animproper cap can result in a malfunc-tion of the fuel system or emissioncontrol system. It may also result infuel leakage in the event of an acci-dent.

EXAMPLE

CAUTIONThe release lever can be hot enoughto burn your finger right after driving.Touch the lever after it becomes coolenough.

NOTICEMake sure that the wiper arms are notraised before you lift up the enginehood to avoid damaging the wiperarms and the engine hood.

CAUTION• The prop rod can be hot enough to

burn your finger right after driving.Touch the rod after it becomes coolenough.

• Insert the end of the rod into thehole securely. If the rod drops off,your body may be caught in thehood.

• The rod may drop off when thehood is hit by a wind. Be careful onwindy days.

87

Page 99: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-3

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

To close the engine hood:1) Lift the hood up slightly and remove the

prop rod from the hole. Put the prop rodback to the holding clip.

76MS014

2) Lower the hood to about 20 cm abovethe hood latch, then let it drop down. Make sure the hood is securely latchedafter closing.

Sun Visor

79J161

The sun visors can be pulled down to blockglare coming through the windshield, orthey can be unhooked and turned to theside to block glare coming through the sidewindow.

Card holder (if equipped)

67LH064

(1) Card holder

You can put a card in the card holder (1) onthe back of the sun visor.

WARNINGMake sure the hood is fully closedand latched before driving. If it is not,it can fly up unexpectedly duringdriving, obstructing your view andresulting in an accident.

EXAMPLE

CAUTIONTo avoid injury, be sure no part of theoccupant’s body such as hands orhead is in the path of the hood whenclosing it.

NOTICEPressing the hood from above maydamage the hood.

EXAMPLE

NOTICEWhen unhooking and hooking a sunvisor, be sure to handle it by the hardplastic parts or the sun visor can bedamaged.

NOTICEWhen you park your vehicle outdoorsin direct sunlight or in hot weather,do not leave plastic cards in theholder. The heat may distort them.

(1)

EXAMPLE

88

Page 100: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-4

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Vanity mirror (if equipped)

74LHT0532

(2) Vanity mirror

There is a vanity mirror (2) on the back ofthe sun visor.

Interior LightType A

61MM0A107

Type B

76MH0A138

This light switch has three positions whichfunction as described below:

ON (a)The light comes on and stays on regardlessof whether the door is open or closed.

DOOR (b)The light comes on when the door isopened. After closing all doors, the light will remainon for about 15 seconds and then fade out.If you insert the key into the ignition switchduring that time, the light will start to fadeout immediately. After removing the key from the ignitionswitch, the light will turn on for about 15seconds and then fade out.

NOTE:To save the battery, about 15 minutes afterany of the doors is left open, the light willturn off automatically.

OFF (c)The light remains off even when the door isopened.

76MH0A069

WARNING• Do not use the mirror while driving

your vehicle or could lose controlof the vehicle.

• When using the vanity mirror, donot move too close to a front airbag (if equipped) location or leanagainst it. If the front air bag isaccidentally inflated, it could hityou hard.

(2)

EXAM-

(a)(b)(c)EXAMPLE

(a)(b)(c)

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

89

Page 101: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-5

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

NOTE:The number of doors involved in the light-ing operation of the interior light dependson the vehicle specification. If there is aswitch (rubber projection) at the dooropening as shown, the door is involved inthe lighting operation. The tailgate is alsoinvolved in this operation even without therubber projection.

Accessory Socket (if equipped)

76MH0A070

The accessory socket will work when theignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” posi-tion. This socket can be used to provide 12volt/120 watt power for electrical accesso-ries.

AUX/USB Socket (if equipped)

76MH0A071

Connect your portable digital music player,etc. to this socket to enjoy music throughthe vehicle’s audio system using it as asource. Refer to “Audio System” in thissection.

Assist Grips (if equipped)

76MH0A072

Assist grips are provided for convenience.EXAMPLE

NOTICEUse of inappropriate electrical acces-sories can cause damage to yourvehicle’s electrical system. Makesure that any electrical accessoriesyou use are designed to plug into thistype of socket.

EXAMPLE

NOTICEAlways close the lid when not in use,since entry of foreign material, dust,water, conductive liquids may dam-age the audio system or USB device.

NOTICETo avoid damaging the assist gripand the molded headlining, do nothang down the assist grip.

90

Page 102: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-6

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

Glove Box

76MH0A073

To open the glove box, pull the latch lever.To close it, push the lid until it latchessecurely.

WARNINGNever drive with the glove box lidopen. It could cause injury if an acci-dent occurs.

EXAMPLE

Cup Holder and Storage Area

76MH0A074

(1) Instrument panel pocket (driver’s side) (2) Instrument panel pocket (center)

(3) Front cup holders (4) Front door pocket

(5) Rear cup holder (6) Rear door pocket

(4)(1)

(4)(5)(3)(2)

(6)

(6)

EXAMPLE

91

Page 103: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-7

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Instrument Panel Pocket (driver’s side) (1) / Instrument Panel Pocket (center) (2)

Front Cup Holders (3)

Rear Cup Holder (5)

76MH0A075

Open the top to use the cup holder.

Rear Door Pocket (6)This pocket is provided for holding lightand small items.

Bottle holderYou should hold a bottle with a cap in theholder.

Floor Mats (if equipped)

68LM554

To prevent the driver’s side floor mat fromsliding forward and possibly interfering withthe operation of the pedals, Maruti genuinefloor mats are recommended.Whenever you put the driver’s side floormat back in the vehicle after it has beenremoved, be sure to hook the floor matgrommet(s) to the fastener(s) and positionthe floor mat properly in the footwell.

When you replace the floor mats in yourvehicle with a different type such as all-weather floor mats, we highly recommendusing Maruti genuine floor mats for properfitting.

WARNINGDo not place any objects which mayfall out from the pocket when the vehi-cle is moving.Failure to take the precaution mayresult in an object interfering with thepedals and causing a loss of vehiclecontrol or an accident.

WARNINGFailure to take the precautions listedbelow could cause personal injury orvehicle damage.• Be careful when you are using the

cup holders to hold a cup contain-ing hot liquid. Spilling out hot liquidcan cause burn injury.

• Do not use the cup holders to holdsharp-edged, hard, or breakableobjects. Objects in the cup holdersmay be thrown about during a sud-den stop or impact, and could causepersonal injury.

• Be careful not to spill liquid or insertany foreign materials into the mov-ing part of the gearshift lever, or anyelectrical components. Liquid or for-eign materials may damage theseparts.

EXAMPLE EXAMPLE

92

Page 104: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-8

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Luggage Compartment HooksShopping Hook

76MH0A104

You can hang the shopping bag or othersuitable objects on the hook.This hook is not designed for large orheavy items.

Luggage Compartment Cover (if equipped)

76MH0A076

Luggage or other cargo placed in the lug-gage compartment is hidden from view bya luggage compartment cover.

WARNINGFailure to take the following precau-tions may result in the driver’s sidefloor mat interfering with the pedalsand causing a loss of vehicle controlor an accident.• Make sure that the floor mat grom-

met(s) is(are) hooked to the fas-tener(s).

• Never place additional floor matson top of the existing floor mat.

EXAMPLE

NOTICETo avoid breaking the hook, do nothang items heavier than followingweight.Shopping hook: 1 kg (2.2 lbs)

EXAMPLE

WARNINGDo not carry items on top of the lug-gage compartment cover, even if theyare small and light. Objects on top ofthe cover could be thrown about inan accident, causing injury, or couldobstruct the driver’s rear view.

NOTICETo avoid damaging the luggage com-partment cover:• Do not push down on it or lean on

it.• Handle it carefully when installing

or removing.

93

Page 105: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-9

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Frame HooksFront

76MH0A077

The frame hook (1) is provided on the frontof the vehicle for use in emergency situa-tions and train shipping purposes only.

To tow your vehicle on the road or highway,follow the instruction of “Towing” in “EMER-GENCY SERVICE” section.

Rear

76MH0A078

The frame hook (2) is provided on the rearof the vehicle for use in emergency situa-tions and train/sea shipping purposes only.

To tow your vehicle on the road or highway,follow the instruction of “Towing” in “EMER-GENCY SERVICE” section.

WARNINGDo not use the frame hooks to towanother vehicle or to have your vehi-cle towed on the road or highway.The hook (1) is designed for use inemergency situations only, such as ifyour vehicle or another vehicle getsstuck in deep mud or snow.

(1)

NOTICEWhen you use the frame hook (1),avoid the driving that gives signifi-cant physical shock on hook. Suchoperation can damage the hook, orthe vehicle body.Do not accelerate suddenly.

(2) EXAMPLE

WARNINGDo not use the frame hooks to towanother vehicle or to have your vehi-cle towed on the road or highway.The hook (2) is designed for use inemergency situations only, such as ifyour vehicle or another vehicle getsstuck in deep mud or snow.

NOTICEWhen you use the frame hook (2),avoid the driving that gives signifi-cant physical shock on hook. Suchoperation can damage the hook, thevehicle body or the drive system.

• Do not accelerate suddenly.• Do not tow the vehicle heavier than

your vehicle.

94

Page 106: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-10

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System (if equipped)Air outlet

76MH0A080

1. Windshield defroster outlet2. Side defroster outlet3. Side outlet4. Center outlet5. Front floor outlet

Side outlet

76MH0A118

When “Open”, air comes out regardless ofthe air flow selector position.

Center outlet

76MH0A081

Move the knob (1) vertically or horizontallyto adjust the direction of airflow as desired.

Description of Controls

76MH0A082

Temperature selector (1)

This is used to select the temperature byturning the selector.

Blower speed selector (2)This is used to turn on the blower and toselect blower speed by turning the selec-tor.

Air flow selector (3)

61MM0A019

This is used to select one of the functionsdescribed below.

Ventilation (a)

76MH0A083

Temperature-controlled air comes out ofthe center and side air outlets.

1 1

2 2

3

3

4

55

EXAMPLE

(1) (1)

01 2 3

4

(3) (4) (1)

(2) (5)

(a)

(b)

(e)

(d)

(c)

95

Page 107: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-11

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Bi-level (b)

76MH0A084

Temperature-controlled air comes out ofthe floor outlets and cooler air comes outof the center and side outlets. When thetemperature selector (1) is in the fullyCOLD position or fully HOT position, how-ever, the air from the floor outlets and theair from the center and side outlets will bethe same temperature.

Heat (c)

76MH0A085

Temperature-controlled air comes out ofthe floor outlets and the side outlets, alsocomes out of the windshield defroster out-lets and also comes slightly out of the sidedefroster outlets.

Heat & defrost (d)

76MH0A087

Temperature-controlled air comes out ofthe floor outlets, the windshield defrosteroutlets, the side defroster outlets and theside outlets.

Defrost (e)

76MH0A088

Temperature-controlled air comes out ofthe windshield defroster outlets, the sidedefroster outlets and the side outlets.

Air intake selector (4)

76MH0A089

This selector is used to select the followingmodes.

Fresh Air (f)When this mode is selected by moving thelever to right, outside air is used.

Recirculated Air (g)When this mode is selected by moving thelever to left, outside air is shut out andinside air is recirculated. This mode is suit-able when driving through dusty or pollutedair such as in a tunnel, or when attemptingto quickly cool down the interior.

NOTE:If you select “RECIRCULATED AIR” for anextended period of time, the air in the vehi-cle can become contaminated. Therefore,you should occasionally select “FRESHAIR”.

(g) (f)

96

Page 108: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-12

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Air conditioning switch (5)To turn on the air conditioning system, setthe blower speed selector to a positionother than “OFF” and push in the “A/C”switch. With this “A/C” switch operation, aindicator light will come on when the airconditioning system is on. To turn off theair conditioning system, push the “A/C”switch again.

During operation of the air conditioner, youmay notice slight changes in enginespeed. These changes are normal, thesystem is designed so that the compressorturns on or off to maintain the desired tem-perature.

Less operation of the compressor resultsin better fuel economy.

System Operating InstructionsNatural ventilationSelect “VENTILATION” and “FRESH AIR”,the temperature selector to the desiredtemperature position, and the blowerspeed selector to “OFF”. Fresh air will flowthrough the vehicle during driving.

Forced ventilationThe control settings are the same as fornatural ventilation except you set theblower speed selector to a position otherthan “OFF”.

Normal heating (using outside air)Select “HEAT” and “FRESH AIR”, the tem-perature selector to the desired tempera-ture position and the blower speed selector

to the desired blower speed position. Set-ting the blower speed selector to a higherblower speed position increases heatingefficiency.

Quick heating (using recirculated air)The control settings are the same as fornormal heating except you select “RECIR-CULATED AIR”. If you use this heatingmethod for an extended period of time, theair in the vehicle can become contami-nated and the windows can become misty.Therefore, use this method only for quickheating and change to the normal heatingmethod as soon as possible.

Head cooled/Feet warmed heatingSelect “BI-LEVEL” and “FRESH AIR”, thetemperature selector to the desired tem-perature position, and the blower speedselector to the desired blower speed posi-tion. Unless the temperature selector is inthe fully COLD position or fully HOT posi-tion, the air that comes out of the centerand side outlets will be cooler than the airthat comes out of the floor outlets.

Normal coolingSet the air flow selector to “VENTILA-TION”, the temperature selector to thedesired temperature position and theblower speed selector to the desiredblower speed position, and turn on the “A/C” switch. Setting the blower speed selec-tor to a higher blower speed positionincreases cooling efficiency.

You can switch the air intake selector toeither “FRESH AIR” or “RECIRCULATEDAIR” as you desire. Choosing “RECIRCU-LATED AIR” increases cooling efficiency.

Quick cooling (using recirculated air)The control settings are the same as fornormal cooling except you select “RECIR-CULATED AIR” and the highest blowerspeed.

NOTE:• To turn on the air conditioning system,

push in the “A/C” switch and set theblower speed selector to a position otherthan “OFF”. With this “A/C” switch opera-tion, an indicator light will come on whenthe air conditioning system is on. To turnoff the air conditioning system, push the“A/C” switch again.

• During operation of the air conditioner,you may notice slight changes in enginespeed. These changes are normal, thesystem is designed so that the compres-sor turns on or off to maintain thedesired temperature. Less operation ofthe compressor results in better fueleconomy.

NOTE:• If you select “RECIRCULATED AIR” for

an extended period of time, the air in thevehicle can become contaminated.Therefore, you should occasionallyselect “FRESH AIR”.

• If your vehicle has been left in the sunwith the windows closed, it will cool

97

Page 109: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-13

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

faster if you open the windows brieflywhile you operate the air conditioner withthe air intake selector at “FRESH AIR”and the blower at high speed.

DehumidifyingSet the air flow selector to a desired air flowselector position, the temperature selectorto the desired temperature position and theblower speed selector to the desired blowerspeed position. Also select “FRESH AIR”and turn on the “A/C” switch.

NOTE:Because the air conditioner dehumidifiesthe air, turning it on will help keep the win-dows clear, even when blowing heated airusing the “DEFROST” or “HEAT &DEFROST” functions.

76MH0A090

NOTE:If you need maximum defrosting:• set the air flow selector to “DEFROST”,

• set the blower speed selector to HIGH,• adjust the temperature selector to the

HOT end,• turn on the “A/C” switch, and• adjust the side outlets so the air blows on

the side windows.

MaintenanceIf you do not use the air conditioner for along period, such as during winter, it maynot give the best performance when youstart using it again. To help maintain opti-mum performance and durability of your airconditioner, it needs to be run periodically.Operate the air conditioner at least once amonth for one minute with the engineidling. This circulates the refrigerant and oiland helps protect the internal components.

NOTE:Your vehicle uses the air conditioningrefrigerant HFC-134a, commonly called“R-134a”. R-134a replaced R-12 around1993 for automotive applications. Otherrefrigerants are available, including recy-cled R-12, but only R-134a should be usedin your vehicle.

Radio Antenna

68KN028

The radio antenna on the roof is remov-able. To remove the antenna, turn it coun-terclockwise. To reinstall the antenna, turnit clockwise firmly by hand.

EXAMPLE

NOTICEUsing the wrong refrigerant maydamage your air conditioning sys-tem. Use R-134a only. Do not mix orreplace the R-134a with other refrig-erants.

NOTICETo avoid damage to the radioantenna:• Remove the antenna when using an

automatic car wash.• Remove the antenna when the

antenna hits anything such as alow ceiling in a parking garage orputting a car cover over your vehi-cle.

EXAMPLE

98

Page 110: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-14

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Audio System (if equipped) Safety Information

Notes on DiscsPrecautions• When the inside of the vehicle is very

cold and the player is used soon afterswitching on the heater, condensationmay form on the disc or the optical partsof the player and proper playback maynot be possible. If condensation forms

on the disc, wipe it off with a soft cloth. Ifcondensation forms on the optical partsof the player, do not use the player forabout one hour. This will allow the con-densation to disappear normally.

• Driving on extremely bumpy roads whichcause severe vibrations may causesound to skip.

• This unit uses a precision mechanism.Even in the event that trouble arises,never open the case, disassemble theunit, or lubricate the rotating parts.Please bring the unit to an authorizedMARUTI SUZUKI dealer.

Cautions on Handling

This unit has been designed specifically forplayback of compact discs bearing mark(A) shown above.No other discs can be played.

WARNINGIf you pay extended attention to oper-ating the audio system or viewing theaudio system display while driving,an accident can occur. If you set thesound volume too loud, it could pre-vent you from being aware of roadand traffic conditions.• Keep your eyes on the road and

your mind on the drive. Avoid pay-ing extended attention to operatingthe audio system or viewing theaudio system display.

• Familiarize yourself with the audiosystem controls and operation ofthe audio system before driving.

• Preset your favorite radio stationsbefore driving so that you canquickly tune to them using the pre-sets.

• Set the sound volume to a levelthat will allow you to continue to beaware of road and traffic conditionswhile driving.

(A)

Removing the disc Proper way to hold

99

Page 111: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-15

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

To remove the compact disc from its stor-age case, press down on the center of thecase and lift the disc out, holding it care-fully by the edges.

Always handle the compact disc by theedges.Never touch the surface.

To remove fingermarks and dust, use asoft cloth, and wipe in a straight line fromthe center of the compact disc to the cir-cumference.

New discs may have some roughnessaround the edges. The unit may not workor the sound may skip if such discs areused. Use a ball-point pen (B), etc. toremove the roughness (C) from the edgesof the disc before inserting it into the unit.

Never stick labels on the surface of thecompact disc or write on the surface with apencil or pen.

Do not use any solvents such as commer-cially available cleaners, anti-static spray,or thinner to clean compact discs.

Do not use compact discs that have largescratches, are misshaped, or cracked, etc. Use of such discs will cause damage orprevent the system from operating prop-erly.

Do not expose compact discs to direct sun-light or any heat source.

NOTE:• Do not use commercially available CD

protection sheets or discs equipped withstabilizers, etc.These may get caught in the internalmechanism and damage the disc.

• It may be impossible to play CD-R discswith this unit due to the recording condi-tions.

• CD-RW discs cannot be played with thisunit.(B)

(B)(C) WARNINGThis is a class I laser product. Use ofcontrols or adjustments or perfor-mance of procedures other than thosespecified herein may result in hazard-ous radiation exposure.Do not open covers and do notattempt to repair this unit by yourself.Refer servicing to qualified personnel.

100

Page 112: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-16

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

The Bluetooth® word mark and logo areregistered trademarks and are owned bythe Bluetooth SIG, Ink.

Stop using this unit and a Bluetooth®

ready device whenever requested.This unit shares the communication fre-quency with other private or public wirelesscommunication equipment such as a wire-less LAN and other wireless communica-tion radios.You should stop using this unit wheneveryou are notified that your unit disturbsother wireless communication immediately.

Bluetooth® Mic (1) (if equipped)

Basic Operations

(1) VOL PUSH POWER knob(2) TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob(3) MUTE button

Turning power on/offPress the VOL PUSH POWER knob (1).The unit starts in the function mode it wasin when the power was turned off last.

Adjusting the volumeTurn the VOL PUSH POWER knob (1).Turning it clockwise increases the volume;turning it counterclockwise decreases thevolume.

NOTE:While driving, adjust the volume to anextent that sound and/or noise comingfrom outside the vehicle can be heard.

MutePress the MUTE button (3) to mute thesound. To cancel the mute, press theMUTE button (3) again.

Adjusting bass/treble/balance /fader1) Press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH

SOUND knob (2).Each time the knob is pressed, soundadjustment will change as follows:

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (2) to adjust the sound.

Adjusting the AVC (Auto volume con-trol)The Auto Volume Control (AVC) functionautomatically adjusts (increases/decreases) the sound volume in accor-dance with vehicle speed. The AVC controlis provided with three selectable levels(LEVEL OFF, 1, 2, 3). The range of volumeadjustment increases together with theLEVEL number.1) Press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH

SOUND knob (2) until the AVC adjust-ment mode is selected.

(1)

(1)(2)

(3)Preset-EQ (EQ OFF)

Bass adjustment (BASS 0)

Treble adjustment (TREBLE 0)

Balance adjustment (BALANCE 0)

Fader adjustment (FADER 0)

AVC adjustment (AVC LEVEL 2)

101

Page 113: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-17

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (2) to select the desiredAVC adjustment level. (Initial setting:LEVEL 2)

Preset-EQPreset-EQ calls up various sound types inaccordance with the listening music type.1) Press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH

SOUND knob (2) several times until“PRESET-EQ” appears.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (2). Each time the knob is turned, presetEQ mode will change as follows:

Listening to the Radio

Display

(1) FM button(2) AM button(3) Up button(4) Down button(5) TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob(6) Preset buttons ([1] to [6])(7) AS button

(A) Band(B) Frequency

Selecting the FM bandPress the FM button (1).Each time the button is pressed, the recep-tion band will change as follows:

Selecting the AM bandPress the AM button (2).

Seek tuningPress the seek Up button (3) or the seekDown button (4).The unit stops searching for a station at afrequency where a broadcast station isavailable.

Manual tuningTurn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUNDknob (5).The frequency being received is displayed.

Preset memory1) Select the desired station.2) Hold down a desired button ([1] to [6])

of the Preset buttons (6) to which youwant to store the station for 2 secondsor longer.

OFF (FLAT)

JAZZ

ROCK

POP

CLASSIC

HIP-HOP

(7)

(1)(2)

(5)

(4)(3)

(6)

(A)

(B)

FM1 FM2

102

Page 114: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-18

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Auto storeHold down the AS button (7) for 2 secondsor longer.Six stations in good reception will automat-ically be stored to the Preset buttons (6) inorder, starting from a station whose fre-quency is the lowest.

NOTE:• Auto store can be released by pressing

AS button (7) while auto store is underway.

• When the auto store is performed, thestation previously stored in the memoryat the position is overwritten.

• When there are fewer than 6 stationsthat can be stored even if 1 round ofauto store operation is performed, nostation will be stored at the remainingPreset buttons (6).

• 6 stations can be preset for FM1 andFM2 in common, and 6 stations for AMin auto store mode.

Auto store mode on/offPress the AS button (7).Each time the button is pressed, the modeis switched as follows:

Radio ReceptionRadio reception can be affected by envi-ronment, atmospheric conditions, or radiosignal’s power and distance from the sta-tion. Nearby mountains and buildings mayinterfere or deflect radio reception, causingpoor reception. Poor reception or radiostatic can also be caused by electric cur-rent from overhead wires or high voltagepower lines.

Listening to a CD

Display

(1) Insertion slot(2) Eject button(3) CD button(4) Up button(5) Down button(6) RPT button(7) RDM button(8) DISP button

(A) Track number(B) Play time

NOTE:This product does not support 8 cm CD(sometimes called as “mini single CD”, “3-inch CD”, “CD3”, etc.).

• CDs or CD-ROM carrying no mark (A)cannot be used.

• Some discs recorded in CD-R/CD-RWformat may sometimes be impossible touse.

AS mode on AS mode off

(7)

(3)

(8)

(6)

(5)(4)

(2)

(1)

(B)

(A)

(A)

103

Page 115: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-19

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

• A CD is to be inserted with its label sideup.

• When there is a CD already in the unit, itis impossible to insert another CD with-out ejecting the CD in the unit. Do notuse force to insert a CD into the CDinsertion slot.

Loading a CDInsert a CD in the Insertion slot (1).When a CD is loaded, play starts.

Ejecting a CDPress the Eject button (2).When the ignition switch is in “LOCK” posi-tion, the CD remained ejected for around15 seconds or longer will automatically bedrawn inside the unit. (Auto reload func-tion)The backup eject function:This function allows you to eject a CD bypressing the Eject button (2) even whenthe ignition switch is in “LOCK” position.

Listening to a CDWhen a CD is inserted, playback will auto-matically start.When a CD is already inside the unit,press the CD button (3) to start playback.

Selecting a track• Press the Up button (4) to listen to the

next track.• Press the Down button (5) twice to listen

to the previous track.When the Down button (5) is pressedonce, the track currently being playedwill start from the beginning again.

Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track• Hold down the Up button (4) to fast for-

ward the track.• Hold down the Down button (5) to fast

rewind the track.

Random playbackPress the RDM button (7).Each time the button is pressed, the modewill change as follows:

• TRACK RANDOMThe random indicator “RDM” will light.The tracks in the loaded disc will beplayed in random order.

Repeat playbackPress the RPT button (6).Each time the button is pressed, the modewill change as follows:

• TRACK REPEATThe repeat indicator “RPT” will light.The track currently being played will beplayed repeatedly.

NOTICE• Never insert your finger or hand

into the CD insertion slot. Neverinsert foreign objects.

• Never insert a CD with glue comingout from adhesive tape or a rentalCD label or with a trace indicatingthat adhesive tape or a rental CDlabel has been removed. This maycause the CD not to eject or resultin a malfunction.

NOTICEIf you forcefully try to push anejected CD inside the unit before autoreloading, the disc surface might bescratched.When reloading a CD, remove it fromthe unit completely before reloading.

OFF TRACK RANDOM

OFF TRACK REPEAT

104

Page 116: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-20

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Display changePress the DISP button (8).Each time the button is pressed, displaywill change as follows:

NOTE:• “NO TITLE” will be displayed when there

is no text information in the disc currentlybeing played.

• If text data contains more than 12 char-acters, the “>” mark will appear at theright end. Holding down the DISP button(8) for 1 second or longer can display thenext page.

Listening to an MP3/WMA/AAC Disc

Display

(1) TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob(2) Up button(3) Down button(4) RPT button(5) RDM button(6) DISP button

(A) Folder number(B) Track number(C) Play time(D) DISC type

Selecting a folderTurn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUNDknob (1) to select a folder.

Selecting a track• Press the Up button (2) to listen to the

next track.• Press the Down button (3) twice to listen

to the previous track.When the Down button (3) is pressedonce, the track currently being playedwill start from the beginning again.

Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track• Hold down the Up button (2) to fast for-

ward the track.• Hold down the Down button (3) to fast

rewind the track.

Random playbackPress the RDM button (5).Each time the button is pressed, the modewill change as follows:

• FOLDER RANDOMThe random indicator “RDM.F” will light.The tracks in the current folder will beplayed in random order.

• ALL RANDOMThe random indicator “RDM” will light.

Play time

Disc title

Track title

(5)

(6)

(4)

(3)

(1)

(2)

(C)

(B)(A)

(D)

OFF FOLDER RANDOM ALL RANDOM

105

Page 117: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-21

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

The tracks in the loaded disc will beplayed in random order.

Repeat playbackPress the RPT button (4).Each time the button is pressed, the modewill change as follows:

• FILE REPEATThe repeat indicator “RPT” will light.The track currently being played will beplayed repeatedly.

• FOLDER REPEATThe repeat indicator “RPT.F” will light.All tracks in the currently selected folderwill be played repeatedly.

Display changePress the DISP button (6).Each time the button is pressed, displaywill change as follows:

NOTE:• “NO TITLE” will be displayed when there

is no text information in the disc currentlybeing played.

• If text data contains more than 12 char-acters, the “>” mark will appear at theright end. Holding down the DISP button(6) for 1 second or longer can display thenext page.

Notes on MP3/WMA/AACWhat is MP3?• MP3 (MPEG audio layer3) is an audio

compression format that has become thestandard format among PC users. Itsmerit is that the original audio data iscompressed to approximately 1/10 andhigh sound quality is maintained. Thismeans that it is possible to store the dataof approximately 10 music CDs on a sin-gle CD-R/RW disc, which in turn makesit possible to play music for a long timewithout having to change the disc.

What is WMA?• An abbreviation of “Windows Media

Audio,” WMA is an audio compressionformat developed by Microsoft.

• WMA files for which the DRM (DigitalRights Management) function is ON can-not be played.

• Windows MediaTM and the Windows®

logo are trademarks or registered trade-marks of Microsoft Corporation in theUnited States and other countries.

What is AAC?• An abbreviation of “Advanced Audio

Coding,” AAC is an audio compressionformat used by MPEG2 and MPEG4.

OFF FILE REPEAT FOLDER REPEAT

Play time

Folder name

File name

Album name (MP3, AAC only)

Track title

Artist name

106

Page 118: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-22

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Points to remember when making MP3/WMA/AAC filesCommon• High bit rate and high sampling fre-

quency are recommended for high qual-ity sounds.

• Selecting VBR (Variable Bit Rate) is notrecommended. Selecting VBR maycause display of incorrect playing timeand jumpiness of playback.

• Playback sound quality varies dependingon the encoding environment. Fordetails, refer to the user manual of theencoding software and the writing soft-ware in use.

Recording MP3/WMA/AAC files on a CDmedia• It is recommended not to write both CD-

DA files and MP3/WMA/AAC files on adisc.

• If both CD-DA files and MP3/WMA/AACfiles are on the same disc, tracks maynot be played in the correct order orsome tracks may not be played at all.

• When storing both MP3 data and WMAdata on the same disc, sort and placethem in different folders.

• Do not write files other than MP3/WMA/AAC files and unnecessary folders on adisc.

• MP3/WMA/AAC files should be namedto meet the standards and the file sys-tem specifications as shown below.

• The file extension “.mp3”, “.wma” or“.m4a” should be assigned to files basedon their format independently.

• You may encounter a trouble in playingMP3/WMA/AAC files or displaying infor-mation of MP3/WMA/AAC files depend-ing on the writing software or CDrecorder in use.

• This unit does not have a play list func-tion.

• It is recommended to write discs in Disc-at-Once mode even though Multi-ses-sion mode is supported.

Compression formatsMP3• Bit rate:

MPEG1 Audio Layer III: 32 k - 320 kbpsMPEG2 Audio Layer III: 8 k - 160 kbpsMPEG2.5 Audio Layer III: 8 k - 160 kbps

• Sampling frequency:MPEG1 Audio Layer III: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHzMPEG2 Audio Layer III: 16 k/22.05 k/24 kHzMPEG2.5 Audio Layer III: 8 k/11.025 k/12 kHz

WMA (Ver. 7, Ver. 8, Ver. 9*)• Bit rate: CBR 32 k - 320 kbps• Sampling frequency: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHz* WMA 9 Professional/LossLess/Voice are

not supported.

AAC*• Bit rate: ABR 16k - 320 kbbs • Sampling frequency: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHz* Apple Lossless is not supported.

Supported file systemsISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Joliet, Romeo

Maximum number of files/folders• Maximum number of files: 512• Maximum number of files in a folder: 255• Maximum depth of tree structure: 8• Maximum number of folders: 255

(Root folder is included.)

NOTICENever assign the “.mp3”, “.wma”, or“.m4a” file name extension to a file ifit is not in the MP3/WMA/AAC formatfile. Failure to observe this may resultin damage to the speaker due tonoise production.

107

Page 119: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-23

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Listening to files stored in a USB device

Display

(1) MEDIA button(2) TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob(3) Up button(4) Down button(5) RPT button(6) RDM button(7) DISP button

(A) Folder number(B) Track number(C) Play time(D) File type

Selecting a USB device modePress the MEDIA button (1).Each time the button is pressed, the modewill change as follows:

Selecting a folderTurn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUNDknob (2) to select the desired folder.

Selecting a track• Press the Up button (3) to listen to the

next track.• Press the Down button (4) twice to listen

to the previous track.When the Down button (4) is pressedonce, the track currently being playedwill start from the beginning again.

Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track• Hold down the Up button (3) to fast for-

ward the track.• Hold down the Down button (4) to fast

rewind the track.

Random playbackPress the RDM button (6).Each time the button is pressed, the modewill change as follows:

• FOLDER RANDOMThe random indicator “RDM.F” will light.The tracks in the currently selectedfolder will be played in random order.

• ALL RANDOMThe random indicator “RDM” will light.The tracks in the connected USB devicewill be played in random order.

Repeat playbackPress the RPT button (5).Each time the button is pressed, the modewill change as follows:

(6)

(7)

(5)

(4)

(2)

(3)

(1)

(C)

(B)(A)

(D)

NOTICEDo not connect any USB device otherthan a USB memory or a USB audioplayer. Do not connect multiple USBdevices to the USB connector using aUSB hub, etc. Supplying power tomultiple USB devices from the con-nector could cause overheating andsmoking.

USB (iPod®) (if equipped)

Bluetooth® audio (if equipped)

AUX (if equipped)

OFF FOLDER RANDOM ALL RANDOM

108

Page 120: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-24

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

• FILE REPEATThe repeat indicator “RPT” will light.The track currently being played will beplayed repeatedly.

• FOLDER REPEATThe repeat indicator “RPT.F” will light.All the tracks in the folder currentlyselected will be played repeatedly.

Display changePress the DISP button (7).Each time the button is pressed, displaywill change as follows:

NOTE:• “NO TITLE” will be displayed when there

is no text information in the disc currentlybeing played.

• If text data contains more than 12 char-acters, the “>” mark will appear at theright end. Holding down the DISP button(7) for 1 second or longer can display thenext page.

Notes on USB deviceCompatible USB devices• USB Mass Storage Class

For details as to whether your USBmemory/USB Audio is compatible withUSB Mass Storage Class, please con-tact the USB memory/USB Audio manu-facturer.

• USB Standard Compatibility 1.1/2.0 FullSpeed

• File System FAT12/16/32, VFAT• Maximum current less than 1.0 A• If devices such as USB hub, extension

cable are connected to the audio sys-tem, it may not be recognized. In suchcase connect the USB device directly tothe audio system.

• Devices such as MP3 player/Mobilephone/digital camera may not be recog-nized by the audio system for playingmusic.

USB device connection• When connecting a USB device, make

sure that the connector is pushed all theway into the port.

• Do not leave the USB device for longperiods of time in places inside the vehi-cle where the temperature can rise toohigh.

• Back up any important data beforehand.We cannot accept responsibility for anylost data.

• It is recommended not to connect a USBdevice that contains data files other thanMP3/WMA/AAC format.

Recording MP3/WMA/AAC files on aUSB device• Playback or display may not be possible

depending on the type of USB device inuse or the condition of the recording.

• Depending on the connected USB mem-ory, the files may be played in differentorder from the order that the files werestored.

Compression formatsMP3• Bit rate:

MPEG1 Audio Layer III: 32 k - 320 kbpsMPEG2 Audio Layer III: 8 k - 160 kbpsMPEG2.5 Audio Layer III: 8 k - 160 kbps

• Sampling frequency:MPEG1 Audio Layer III: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHzMPEG2 Audio Layer III: 16 k/22.05 k/24 kHzMPEG2.5 Audio Layer III: 8 k/11.025 k/12 kHz

WMA (Ver. 7, Ver. 8, Ver. 9*)• Bit rate: CBR 32 k -320 kbps• Sampling frequency: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHz* WMA 9 Professional/LossLess/Voice are

not supported.

OFF FILE REPEAT FOLDER REPEAT

Play time

Folder name

File name

Album name (MP3, AAC only)

Track title

Artist name

109

Page 121: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-25

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

AAC*• Bit rate: ABR 16k - 320 kbbs • Sampling frequency: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHz* Apple Lossless is not supported.

Maximum number of files/folders• Maximum number of files: 2500• Maximum number of files in a folder: 255• Maximum depth of tree structure: 8• Maximum number of folders: 255

(Root folder is included.)

Listening to an iPod®

Display

(1) MEDIA button(2) TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob(3) Up button(4) Down button(5) RPT button(6) RDM button(7) DISP button(8) Preset buttons ([1] to [6])

(A) Track title(B) Track number(C) Play time

Selecting an iPod® modePress the MEDIA button (1).Each time the button is pressed, the modewill change as follows:

Selecting a track• Press the Up button (3) to listen to the

next track.• Press the Down button (4) twice to listen

to the previous track.When the Down button (4) is pressedonce, the track currently being playedwill start from the beginning again.

Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track• Hold down the Up button (3) to fast for-

ward the track.

• Hold down the Down button (4) to fastrewind the track.

Random playbackPress the RDM button (6).Each time the button is pressed, the modewill change as follows:

• SONG RANDOMThe random indicator “RDM” will light.The tracks in the iPod® will be played inrandom order.

• ALBUM RANDOMThe random indicator “D.RDM” will light.The albums in the iPod® will be played inrandom order.

Repeat playbackPress the RPT button (5).Each time the button is pressed, the modewill change as follows:

• SONG REPEATThe repeat indicator “RPT” will light.The track currently being played will beplayed repeatedly.

(6)(7)

(4)

(2)

(3)

(5) (1)

(8)

(C)

(A)

(B)

USB (iPod®) (if equipped)

Bluetooth® audio (if equipped)

AUX (if equipped)

OFF SONG RANDOM ALBUM RANDOM

OFF SONG REPEAT

110

Page 122: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-26

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Display changePress the DISP button (7).Each time the button is pressed, displaywill change as follows:

NOTE:If text data contains more than 12 charac-ters, the “>” mark will appear at the rightend. Holding down the DISP button (7) for1 second or longer can display the nextpage.

Playing Mode selection1) Press the button numbered [6] of the

Preset buttons (8) for 1 second or lon-ger.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (2).Each time the knob is turned, the modewill change as follows:

3) Press the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (2) to select the desiredmode.

NOTE:• When the button numbered [6] of the

Preset buttons (8) is pressed, the previ-ous mode will be displayed.

Notes on iPod®

Supported iPod®

• iPod® touch (5th generation)• iPod® touch (4rd generation)• iPod® touch (3rd generation)• iPod® touch (2nd generation)• iPod® touch (1st generation)• iPod® classic• iPod® nano (7th generation)• iPod® nano (6th generation)• iPod® nano (5th generation)• iPod® nano (4th generation)• iPod® nano (3rd generation)• iPod® nano (2nd generation)• iPod® nano (1st generation)• iPod® (5th generation)• iPhone® 5• iPhone® 4S• iPhone® 4• iPhone® 3GS• iPhone® 3G• iPhone®

* Some functions may not be availabledepending on the model of iPod®.

* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-tered in the U.S. and other countries.

* iPhone® is a trademark of Apple Inc.,registered in the U.S. and other coun-tries.

* Apple is not responsible for the operationof this device or its compliance withsafety and regulatory standards.

Playlist name /Track title (Playlist mode only)

Artist name /Track title

Album name /Track title

Track title /Play time

PLAYLIST

ARTIST

ALBUM

SONGS

GENRE

111

Page 123: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-27

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

iPod® connection• Make sure to detach the iPod® after

pressing the engine switch to change theignition switch is in “LOCK” position. TheiPod® may not be shut down when it isbeing connected and may result in bat-tery depletion.

• Please do not connect iPod® accesso-ries such as an iPod® remote control orheadphones while connecting the iPod®

with the unit. The unit may not operatecorrectly.

AUX Function

(1) MEDIA button

AUX connectionTo listen to auxiliary audio sources (soldseparately) through the unit, follow theinstruction below.1) Connect the auxiliary audio source to

the AUX/USB socket (separatelyattached) with an AUX cable.

2) Press the MEDIA button (1).Each time the button is pressed, themode will change as follows:

NOTE:• Please consult your place of purchase

for details about whether a given auxil-iary audio source can be connected andthe proper auxiliary cord to use.

• The volume and tone controls of theauxiliary audio source can be adjustedon the unit.

• In AUX mode, the volume setting is dif-ferent from another mode.

Bluetooth® Hands-Free (if equipped)

(1) TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob(2) VOL PUSH POWER knob(3) Preset buttons

Steering switch(1)

CAUTION• Before connection, mute the unit,

and also keep the volume of theauxiliary audio source within arange that will not cause distortion.

• When the audio source is turnedoff, noise may be emitted. Be sureto turn off the unit or switch toanother mode before turning off theaudio source.

USB (iPod®) (if equipped)

Bluetooth® audio (if equipped)

AUX (if equipped)(2)(1)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

112

Page 124: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-28

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

(4) Bluetooth® setup button(5) Off Hook button(6) On Hook button(7) VOL switch

Phone registration

NOTE:• Up to 5 phones can be registered.• To set up a new phone, disconnect the

audio player from the unit. Connect theaudio player again after phone setup iscompleted if necessary.

• When failed to establish the pairingwithin 120 seconds, the connectingoperation will be canceled. Please tryagain or refer to the manual of the phonein use for how to establish the pairingwith the phone.

1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-played.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Blue-tooth”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Pairing”,and press the knob (1) to determine theselection.

4) Select “CAR AUDIO” from the Blue-tooth® menu of the phone and establishthe pairing.Refer to the manual of the phone in usefor further information.

5) Enter the Passkey displayed on the unitto the phone.

6) Press the On Hook button (6).

NOTE:• When selecting “Go Back”, the previous

menu will be displayed.• When additionally registering a phone,

operate the same step from 1).

Receiving a callPress the Off Hook button (5) to receive acall.

Ending a callPress the On Hook button (6) to end a call.

Rejecting a call (only for supportedmodels)Press the On Hook button (6) to reject aincoming call.

Adjusting the listening volume• Turn the VOL PUSH POWER knob (2)

during a call.Turning it clockwise increases the vol-ume; turning it counterclockwisedecreases the volume.

• Press the VOL switch (7) during a call.Pressing “+” of the switch increases thevolume, pressing “-” of the switchdecreases the volume.

Adjusting the ring volume• Turn the VOL PUSH POWER knob (2)

while a call coming in.Turning it clockwise increases the vol-ume; turning it counterclockwisedecreases the volume.

• Press the VOL switch (7) during a call.Pressing “+” of the switch increases thevolume, pressing “-” of the switchdecreases the volume.

Adjusting the call or ringtone volumeFollow the instructions below to adjust thecall or ringtone volume.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).

The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-played.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Tele-phone”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Sound Set-ting”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

(7)

To use the hands-free function with thisunit, it is required to register the phonein advance.

113

Page 125: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-29

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Call Vol-ume” or “Ringtone Volume”, and pressthe knob (1) to determine the selection.The current call or ringtone volume willbe displayed.

5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select desired callor ringtone volume, and press the knob(1) to determine the selection.

NOTE:When selecting “Go Back”, the previousmenu will be displayed.

Selecting the RingtoneFollow the instructions below to select aringtone.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).

The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-played.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Tele-phone”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Sound Set-ting”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Ringtone”,and press the knob (1) to determine theselection.The current ringtone will be sounded.

5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select desired ring-

tone, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

NOTE:When selecting “Go Back”, the previousmenu will be displayed.

Dialing using Missed/Incoming/Outgoing CallsFollow the instructions below to dial to thelast dialed number again.

NOTE:Up to 10 phone numbers of the latest callscan be stored. (10 each for dialed,received and missed call)

1) Press the Off Hook button (5).The Bluetooth® phonebook menu willbe displayed.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “MissedCalls”, “Incoming Calls” or “OutgoingCalls”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.To dial from the dialed history or thereceived history, select “Missed Calls”,“Incoming Calls” or “Outgoing Calls”respectively.

3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select the desirednumber, and press the knob (1) todetermine the selection.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Dial”, andpress the knob (1) or the Off Hook but-ton (5) to dial to the selected number.

NOTE:• When selecting “Go Back”, the previous

menu will be displayed.• Pressing “Confirm” after selecting “Add

Speed Dial” can register the selectednumber in the speed dial.

• Pressing “Confirm” after selecting“Delete” can delete the selected numberfrom the call history.

Deletion of call historyFollow the instructions below to delete amissed/incoming/outgoing call history.1) Press the Off Hook button (5).

The Bluetooth® phonebook menu will bedisplayed.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUNDknob (1) to select “Setup Phonebook”,and press the knob (1) to determine theselection.

3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUNDknob (1) to select “Delete History”, andpress the knob (1) to determine theselection.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUNDknob (1) to select “Missed Calls”,“Incoming Calls”, or “Outgoing Calls”,and press the knob (1) to determine theselection.

5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUNDknob (1) to select a number to bedeleted or “ALL”, and press the knob (1)to determine the selection.

6) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUNDknob (1) to select “Delete?” or “DeleteAll?”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

114

Page 126: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-30

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

7) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Confirm”,and press the knob (1) to complete thedeletion.

NOTE:When selecting “Go Back”, the previousmenu will be displayed.

Registration in PhonebookRegistration of numbers in the phonebook.Follow the instructions below to registerphone numbers in the Phonebook of theunit.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).

The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-played.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Tele-phone”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “SetupPhonebook”, and press the knob (1) todetermine the selection.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Add Con-tacts”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “OverwriteAll” or “Add One Contact”, and pressthe knob (1) to determine the selection. The “Rest of Memory XXXX: Ok?” willbe displayed.

6) Press or turn the TUNE FOLDERPUSH SOUND knob (1) to select “Con-

firm”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

7) Transfer contacts from the phone.When the registration is completed, the“Setup Phonebook” will be displayed.

NOTE:• When selecting “Go Back” the previous

menu will be displayed.• Up to 1000 numbers can be registered in

Phonebook.

Transfer of call history (Call History)Follow the instructions below to transfercall history of the registered phone.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).

The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-played.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Tele-phone”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Call His-tory”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Call His-tory?”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Confirm”,and press the knob (1) to transfer thecall history from the phone.

NOTE:When selecting “Go Back”, the previousmenu will be displayed.

Making a call by PhonebookFollow the instructions below to dial a num-ber registered in Phonebook.1) Press the Off Hook button (5).

The Bluetooth® phonebook menu willbe displayed.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Phone-book”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select the initial ofthe name you would like to make a call,and press the knob (1) to determine theselection. The registered numbers will be dis-played in sequence. If names havebeen registered together with num-bers, the names will be displayed.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Dial”, andpress the knob (1) to determine theselection.

5) Press the Off Hook button (5). The displayed number or the numberregistered with the displayed name willbe dialed.

115

Page 127: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-31

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Deletion of registered data (DeleteEntry)Follow the instructions below to delete anumber registered in Phonebook.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).

The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-played.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Tele-phone”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “SetupPhonebook”, and press the knob (1) todetermine the selection.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Delete Con-tacts”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select a number tobe deleted, and press the knob (1) todetermine the selection.

6) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Delete?”,and press the knob (1) to determine theselection.

1) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Confirm”,and press the knob (1) to complete thedeletion.

NOTE:When selecting “Go Back”, the previousmenu will be displayed.

Registration in speed dialFollow the instructions below to assign anumber to one of the Preset buttons to useas the speed dial.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).

The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-played.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Tele-phone”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “SetupPhonebook”, and press the knob (1) todetermine the selection.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Add SpeedDial”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select a number tobe assigned, and press the knob (1) todetermine the selection.

6) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “ChoosePreset”, and press the knob (1) todetermine the selection.

7) Press one of the Preset buttons (3) towhich the selected number is to beassigned. If a number is alreadyassigned to the selected button, a con-firmation message will be displayed.Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Confirm”,and press the knob (1) to complete theassignment.

When the assignment is completed, the“Setup Phonebook” will be displayed.

NOTE:When selecting “Go Back”, the previousmenu will be displayed.

One-touch call (Speed dial)Follow the instructions below to dial thenumber assigned to each of the Presetbuttons (3).1) Press the Off Hook button (5).

The Bluetooth® phonebook menu willbe displayed.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “SpeedDials”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

3) Press one of the Preset buttons (3). When no number is assigned, “NoEntry” is displayed.

4) Press the Off Hook button (5). The selected number will be dialed.

116

Page 128: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-32

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Deletion of speed dial (Del Speed Dial)To delete a number assigned for the speeddial, follow the instructions below.1) Press the Off Hook button (5).

The Bluetooth® phonebook menu willbe displayed.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “SpeedDials”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

3) Press one of the Preset buttons (3) towhich the number to be deleted isassigned. “No Entry” appears if the number is notregistered.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Delete”, andpress the knob (1) to determine theselection.

5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Del SpeedDial”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

6) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Confirm”,and press the knob (1) to complete thedeletion.

NOTE:When selecting “Go Back”, the previousmenu will be displayed.

Display of device data (Device Name)Follow the instructions below to display theBD (Bluetooth® Device) address anddevice name.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).

The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-played.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Blue-tooth”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “BluetoothInfo”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “DeviceName” or “Device Address”, and pressthe knob (1) to display the device nameor the BD (Bluetooth® Device) address.

NOTE:When selecting “Go Back”, the previousmenu will be displayed.

Reset to the factory defaultsFollow the instructions below to reset allthe settings to the factory defaults.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).

The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-played.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Blue-tooth”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Initialize”,and press the knob (1) to determine theselection.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “All Initial-ize”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Confirm”,and press the knob (1) to start thereset.

NOTE:When selecting “Go Back”, the previousmenu will be displayed.

117

Page 129: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-33

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Selection of phone (Select Phone)Follow the instructions below to select aphone to be paired with from the registeredphones.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).

The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-played.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Blue-tooth”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “List Phone”,and press the knob (1) to determine theselection.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select a phone tobe paired with, and press the knob (1)to determine the selection.

5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Select”, andpress the knob (1) to determine theselection.

NOTE:• When selecting “Go Back”, the previous

menu will be displayed.• The Bluetooth® ready audio device will

be disconnected when the phone isselected.

List of phones (List Phones)Follow the instructions below to display thenames of the registered phones insequence.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).

The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-played.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Blue-tooth”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “List Phone”,and press the knob (1) to determine theselection.The names of the registered phonesare displayed in sequence.

NOTE:When selecting “Go Back”, the previousmenu will be displayed.

Passkey setting (Set Passkey)Follow the instructions below to set thesecurity number (Passkey).1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).

The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-played.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Blue-tooth”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Passkey”,and press the knob (1) to determine theselection.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “New Pass-key”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

5) Press or turn the TUNE FOLDERPUSH SOUND knob (1) to select “Con-firm”.

6) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select a number forthe first digit, and press the knob (1) todetermine the selection. Select anddetermine numbers for the second,third and fourth digits in order in thesame manner. When not entering up tothe eighth digit, enter blanks for thesuccessive digits.

7) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to determine thepasskey setting.

NOTE:When selecting “Go Back”, the previousmenu will be displayed.

118

Page 130: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-34

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Deletion of phone information (DeletePhone)Follow the instructions below to delete theregistered information of the phone.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).

The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-played.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Blue-tooth”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “List Phone”,and press the knob (1) to determine theselection.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select a phone tobe deleted, and press the knob (1) todetermine the selection.

5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “DeletePhone”, and press the knob (1) todetermine the selection.

6) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Delete?”,and press the knob (1) to determine theselection.

7) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Confirm”,and press the knob (1) to determine theselection.

NOTE:When selecting “Go Back”, the previousmenu will be displayed.

BT function on/off (BT Power)Follow the instructions below to turn on/offthe Bluetooth® function.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).

The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-played.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Blue-tooth”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “BT Power”,and press the knob (1) to determine theselection.

4) Press the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “BT PowerOn” or “BT Power Off”.

NOTE:• When the BT function is turned off, the

connection between this unit and theregistered phone in use will be discon-nected.

• When selecting “Go Back”, the previousmenu will be displayed.

Bluetooth® audio (if equipped)

NOTE:• Applicable for Bluetooth® audio ver-

sion 2.1 and above.

Steering switch

(1)

(2)

(4)(3)

(5)

(6)

119

Page 131: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-35

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Display

(1) MEDIA button(2) TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob(3) Up button(4) Down button(5) DISP button(6) Bluetooth® setup button

(A) Track number(B) Play time

Registration of audio devices

NOTE:• To set up a new audio player, disconnect

the phone from the unit. Connect thephone after audio player setup is com-pleted if necessary.

• When failed to establish the connectionwithin 120 seconds, the connectingoperation will be canceled. Please tryagain or refer to the audio player manualfor assistance with the pairing process.

1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (6). The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-played.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (2) to select “Setup Blue-tooth”, and press the knob (2) to deter-mine the selection.

3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (2) to select “Pairing”,and press the knob (2) to determine theselection.

4) Select “CAR AUDIO” from the Blue-tooth® menu of the audio player andestablish the pairing.Refer to the manual of the audio playerin use for further information.

5) Enter the Passkey displayed on the unitto the audio player. (For phones withBluetooth version 2.1 or above passkeyinput is not required).

NOTE:• When selecting “Go Back”, the previous

menu will be displayed.• When additionally registering audio

devices, operate the same step from 1).

Selecting the Bluetooth® audio modePress the MEDIA button (1).Each time the button is pressed, the modewill change as follows:

Selecting a group (only for supportedmodels)Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUNDknob (2) to select a group.

Selecting a trackPress the Up button (3) to listen to the nexttrack.Press the Down button (4) twice to listen tothe previous track.When the Down button (4) is pressedonce, the track currently being played willstart from the beginning again.

Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track• Hold down the Up button (3) to fast for-

ward the track.• Hold down the Down button (4) to fast

rewind the track.

NOTE:Some functions may not be availabledepending on Bluetooth® audio.

Display changePress the DISP button (5).Each time the button is pressed, displaywill change as follows:

(B)

(A)

To use Bluetooth® ready audio deviceswith this unit, it is required to register thedevices.

USB (iPod®) (if equipped)

Bluetooth® audio (if equipped)

AUX (if equipped)

120

Page 132: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-36

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

NOTE:If text data contains more than 12 charac-ters, the “>” mark will appear at the rightend. Holding down the DISP button (5) for1 second or longer can display the nextpage.

Selection of audio device (Select Audio)Follow the instructions below to select anaudio device to be paired with from theregistered audio devices.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (6).

The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-played.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (2) to select “Setup Blue-tooth”, and press the knob (2) to deter-mine the selection.

3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (2) to select “List Audio”,and press the knob (2) to determine theselection.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (2) to select an audio

device to be used, and press the knob(2) to determine the selection.

5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (2) to select “Select”, andpress the knob (2) to determine theselection.

6) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (2) to select “Confirm”,and press the knob (2) to complete thepairing.

NOTE:• When selecting “Go Back”, the previous

menu will be displayed.• The phone will be disconnected when

the Bluetooth® ready audio device isselected.

List of audio devices (List Audio)Follow the instructions below to display thenames of the registered audio devices insequence.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (6).

The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-played.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (2) to select “Setup Blue-tooth”, and press the knob (2) to deter-mine the selection.

3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (2) to select “List Audio”,and press the knob (2) to determine theselection. The names of registeredaudio devices will be displayed insequence.

NOTE:When selecting “Go Back”, the previousmenu will be displayed.

Passkey setting (Set Passkey)Follow the instructions below to set thesecurity number (Passkey).1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (6).

The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-played.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUNDknob (2) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, andpress the knob (2) to determine theselection.

3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUNDknob (2) to select “Passkey”, and pressthe knob (2) to determine the selection.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUNDknob (2) to select “New Passkey”, andpress the knob (2) to determine theselection.

5) Press or turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (2) to select “Confirm”.

6) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUNDknob (2) to select a number for the firstdigit, and press the knob (2) to deter-mine the selection. Select and deter-mine numbers for the second, third andfourth digits in order in the same man-ner. When not entering up to the eighthdigit, enter blanks for the successivedigits.

7) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (2) to determine thepasskey setting.

Play time

Track name

Artist name

Album name

121

Page 133: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-37

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

NOTE:When selecting “Go Back”, the previousmenu will be displayed.

Deletion of audio device information(Delete Audio)Follow the instructions below to delete theregistered information of audio device.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (6).

The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-played.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (2) to select “Setup Blue-tooth”, and press the knob (2) to deter-mine the selection.

3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (2) to select “List Audio”,and press the knob (2) to determine theselection.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (2) to select an audiodevice to be deleted, and press theknob (2) to determine the selection.

5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (2) to select “Delete”, andpress the knob (2) to determine theselection.

6) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (2) to select “Delete?”,and press the knob (2) to determine theselection.

7) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (2) to select “Confirm”,and press the knob (2) to complete thedeletion.

NOTE:When selecting “Go Back”, the previousmenu will be displayed.

Disclaimer for Bluetooth® function• Depending on the mobile phone models,

some phones may not be compatiblefully or partially (some function may berestricted).

• Connectivity or voice quality may getaffected depending on circumstances.

• After the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position, the audio system takesfew seconds to detect and connect to theBluetooth® device (if already paired).

• Make sure that you are aware of allapplicable local laws and accordinglyuse Bluetooth device.

Remote Audio Controls(if equipped)Controlling of basic functions of the audiosystem is available using the switches onthe steering wheel.

Adjusting the volume• To increase the volume, hold down “+” of

the VOL switch (1). The volume will keepon being increased until the switch isreleased.

• To decrease the volume, hold down “-” ofthe VOL switch (1). The volume will keepon being decreased until the switch isreleased.

• To mute the sound, press the switch (2).

Selecting the modePress the switch (3).Each time the button is pressed, the modewill change as follows:

It is possible to turn on the audio system bypressing the switch (3).

(2) (3)

(1) (4)

FM1 (Radio)

FM2 (Radio)

CD

Bluetooth® audio (if equipped)

AUX (if equipped)

USB (iPod®) (if equipped)

AM (Radio)

122

Page 134: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-38

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Selecting the radio station (FM1, FM2,AM mode)• To select the next preset station, press

“ ” of the switch (4) only for a moment.• To select the previous preset station,

press “ ” of the switch (4) only for amoment.

• To scan a higher frequency radio station,press “ ” of the switch (4) for 1 secondor longer.

• To scan a lower frequency radio station,press “ ” of the switch (4) for 1 secondor longer.

Selecting the track (CD, USB (iPod®),Bluetooth® audio mode)• To skip to the next track, press “ ” of the

switch (4) only for a moment.• To skip to the previous track, press “ ” of

the switch (4) twice only for a moment.When the switch (4) is pushed downonce only for a moment, the track cur-rently being played will start from thebeginning again.

Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track• To fast forward, press “ ” of the switch

(4) for 1 second or longer.• To fast rewind, press “ ” of the switch (4)

for 1 second or longer.

Anti-Theft Feature

(1) VOL PUSH POWER knob(2) Preset buttons ([1] to [6])(3) Up button(4) TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob

The anti-theft function is intended to dis-courage thefts, such as that the audio sys-tem becomes inoperable when it isinstalled on other vehicles.This function works by entering a PersonalIdentification Number (PIN).When the unit is disconnected from itspower source, such as when the audiosystem is removed or the battery is discon-nected, the unit will become inoperableuntil the PIN is reentered.

Setting the Anti-Theft Function1) Press the VOL PUSH POWER knob (1)

to power off.2) Hold down the buttons numbered [1]

and [6] of the Preset buttons (2) andpress the VOL PUSH POWER knob (1)“SECURITY” will be displayed.

3) Press the Up button (3) and the buttonnumbered [1] of the Preset buttons (2)simultaneously.

4) Enter a 4-digit number to be registeredas PIN using the buttons numbered [1] -[4] of the Preset buttons (2).

5) Hold down the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (4) for 1 second or longerto set the anti-theft function.

NOTE:Take a note of the registered PIN and keepit for the future use.

Canceling the anti-theft featureTo cancel the anti-theft function, delete theregistered PIN.1) Press the VOL PUSH POWER knob (1)

to power off.2) Hold down the buttons numbered [1]

and [6] of the Preset buttons (2) andpress the VOL PUSH POWER knob (1).“PIN ENTRY” will be displayed.

3) Press the Up button (3) and the buttonnumbered [1] of the Preset buttons (2)simultaneously.

4) Enter a 4-digit number to be registeredas PIN using the buttons numbered [1] -[4] of the Preset buttons (2).

5) Hold down the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (4) for 1 second or longerto delete the registered PIN. The indi-cation “----” will be displayed and theanti-theft function will be canceled.

<

<

<

<

<

<

<

<

(1)(4)

(3)

(2)

123

Page 135: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-39

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

NOTE:To change your PIN, first delete your cur-rent PIN, then set a new one.

Confirming the Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)When the main power source is discon-nected such as when the battery isreplaced, etc, it is required to enter the PINto make the unit operable again.1) Set the ignition switch to the “ACC”

position. “SECURITY” will be displayed.

2) Press the Up button (3) and the buttonnumbered [1] of the Preset buttons (2)simultaneously.

3) Enter a 4-digit number to be registeredas PIN using the buttons numbered [1] -[4] of the Preset buttons (2).

4) Hold down TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (4) for 1 second or lon-ger. When the PIN same as registered isentered, the power of the audio systemwill be turned off automatically and itwill become operable again.

NOTE:If an incorrect PIN is entered, “ERROR”and the total number of incorrect entryattempts will be displayed.If an incorrect PIN is entered 10 times,“HELP” will be displayed and the audiosystem will become inoperable.

Battery InstallationInstall a lithium battery (CR2025) with thepoles facing the correct direction.

Battery replacement timing• When battery power is depleted, the but-

ton may not be operable. If the remotecontroller does not operate, replace thebattery and check the operation.

Caution on battery• Be sure to follow the instructions to pre-

vent battery leakage, over-heating, igni-tion or explosion.

If battery leakage has occurred, wipe thecontainer first then install a new battery. Ifthe battery solution contacts the skin, washoff with water completely.

Caution on Remote Controller• Do not leave the remote controller in an

area exposed to direct sunlight, such ason the dashboard or steering wheel. Theremote controller may deform becauseof the heat, (Be especially careful of thedashboard exposed to direct sunlight inthe summer, as it will become extremelyhot).

• When the vehicle is parked in an areaexposed to direct sunlight, Ensure theremote controller is placed in an area notexposed to direct sunlight. For example:Glove box.Under direct sunlight, signal receptionfrom the remote controller weakens. Ifthis happens, hold the remote controllerclose to the signal receptor on the frontpanel.

WARNING• Do not expose the battery to flame.

Do not short circuit, disassemble,or heat the battery.

• Do not charge the battery.• Use the specified type battery.• Keep the button-shaped battery

away from children to prevent acci-dental swallowing.

If the battery is swallowed, contact adoctor immediately.

CAUTION• Install the battery with the poles

facing the correct direction.• When not in use for a long period

of time, or if the battery is dead,remove the battery from the remotecontroller.

124

Page 136: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-40

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Remote ControllerCommon operations

• In Sound ModePress to adjust the sound.(bass/treble/balance/fader)

• In Preset-EQ ModeThe Preset-EQ setting switches as follows:

• In AVC ModeThe AVC setting switches as follows:

TUNE FOLDER UP/DOWN button

OFF (FLAT)

JAZZ

ROCK

POP

CLASSIC

HIP-HOP

OFF

LEVEL 1

LEVEL 2

LEVEL 3

/TUNEVOL - VOL +FLD

/TUNE

MODE AS SOUND

1

54

FLD

ENTSEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

RPT RDM 6

MENU 32

DISP

• Power ON / OFF

POWER button

• Press to adjust volume.(including at AUX mode)

VOLUME button

• Press to mute the sound. Press it again tocancel the mute.

MUTE button

• While playback, the sound mode switchesas follows (including at AUX mode, exceptwhile displaying iPod menu):

SOUND button

Preset-EQ

BASS

TREBLE

BALANCE

FADER

AVC

• The mode switchesas follows:

MODE button

FM1

FM2

CD

Bluetooth® audio (if equipped)

AUX (if equipped)

USB (iPod®) (if equipped)

AM

125

Page 137: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-41

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

Radio operations

/TUNEVOL - VOL +FLD

/TUNE

MODE AS SOUND

1

54

FLD

ENTSEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

RPT RDM 6

MENU 32

DISP

NOTE:When there are fewer than 6 stations that can be stored even if 1 round of auto store operation is performed, no station will bestored at the remaining preset buttons.

• Press to return to the last received fre-quency in the previous auto store mode.

• Press it for 2 seconds or longer. It selectsthe stations with the stronger signals andstores them in order.

AS button

• Press to select the radio station.

SEEK TRACK UP/DOWN button

• Press to select the desired preset station.

PRESET buttons (1-6)

126

Page 138: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-42

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

CD operations

/TUNEVOL - VOL +FLD

/TUNE

MODE AS SOUND

1

54

FLD

ENTSEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

RPT RDM 6

MENU 32

DISP

• Press to play the current track ran-domly. Press it again to cancel.

RDM (5) button

• Press to plays the current track repeat-edly. Press it again to cancel.

RPT (4) button

• Press to skip to the next/previous track. Press it for 1 second or longer to fast-forward/fast-

rewind the track.

SEEK TRACK UP/DOWN button

• The display switches as follows:

• Press it for 1 second or longer to dis-play the next page.

DISP (6) button

Play time

Disc title

Track title

127

Page 139: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-43

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

MP3/WMA/AAC Disc operations

/TUNEVOL - VOL +FLD

/TUNE

MODE AS SOUND

1

54

FLD

ENTSEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

RPT RDM 6

MENU 32

DISP

The random mode switches as follows:

RDM (5) button

OFF

FOLDER RANDOM

ALL RANDOM

The repeat mode switches as follows:

RPT (4) button

OFF

FILE REPEAT

FOLDER REPEAT

• Press to skip to the next/previous folder.

TUNE FOLDER UP/DOWN button

The display switches as follows:

• Press it for 1 second or longer to display thenext page.

DISP (6) button

Play time

Folder name

File name

Album name (MP3, AAC only)

Track title

Artist name

• Press to skip to the next/previous track.• Press it for 1 second or longer to fast-forward/

fast-rewind the track.

SEEK TRACK UP/DOWN button

128

Page 140: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-44

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

USB operations

/TUNEVOL - VOL +FLD

/TUNE

MODE AS SOUND

1

54

FLD

ENTSEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

RPT RDM 6

MENU 32

DISP

• Press to skip to the next/previous file.• Press it for 1 second or longer to fast-forward/

fast-rewind the file.

SEEK TRACK UP/DOWN button

The repeat mode switches as follows:

RPT (4) button

OFF

FILE REPEAT

FOLDER REPEAT

The display switches as follows:

• Press it for 1 second or longer to display thenext page.

DISP (6) button

Play time

Folder name

File name

Album name (MP3, AAC only)

Track title

Artist name

• Press to skip to the next/previous folder.

TUNE FOLDER UP/DOWN button

The random mode switches as follows:

RDM (5) button

OFF

FOLDER RANDOM

ALL RANDOM

129

Page 141: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-45

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

iPod operations

/TUNEVOL - VOL +FLD

/TUNE

MODE AS SOUND

1

54

FLD

ENTSEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

RPT RDM 6

MENU 32

DISP

While displaying iPod menu, press to select thedesired item and display the list. When a track isselected from the list, the playback starts.

ENT button

The random mode switches as follows:

RDM (5) button

OFF

SONG RANDOM

ALBUM RANDOM

Press to play the current track repeatedly.Press it again to cancel.

RPT (4) button

• The display switches as follows:

• Press it for 1 second or longer to display thenext page.

DISP (6) button

Playlist name / Track title (Playlist mode only)

Artist name / Track title

Album name / Track title

Track title / Play time

During playback• Press to display iPod menu.• Press it for 1 second or longer to display the top menu. While iPod menu is displayed• Press to display the folder in one layer upper.• Press it for 1 second or longer to display the top menu.

MENU button

While displaying iPod menu, press to displaythe next/previous list in the same layer.

TUNE FOLDER UP/DOWN button

• Press to skip to the next/previous file.• Press it for 1 second or longer to fast-forward/

fast-rewind the file.

SEEK TRACK UP/DOWN button

130

Page 142: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-46

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

TroubleshootingWhen encountered a problem, check and follow the instructions as described below.If the described suggestions do not solve the problem, it is recommended to take the unit to your authorized MARUTI SUZUKI dealer.

Problem Possible cause Possible solution

Common

Unable to operate The security function is on.

When “SECURITY” is displayed, enterthe ID.When “HELP” is displayed, contact yourauthorized MARUTI SUZUKI dealer.

Unable to turn on the power (no sound).(No sound is produced) Fuse is blown. Contact your authorized MARUTI

SUZUKI dealer.

Radio

Much noise It may not be exactly tuned in to the sta-tion. Tune it in exactly to the station.

Unable to receive by auto tuning There may be no station emitting signalspowerful enough. Pick up a station by manual tuning.

CD

Sound skips or noise producedThe disc is dirty. Wipe the disc with a soft cloth.

The disc has a major scratch or iswarped.

Replace the disc with the one with noscratch and also not warped.

131

Page 143: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-47

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

MP3/WMA/AAC

No playback The disc contains unsupported formatteddata. Check the file format.

Sound skips or noise produced Sound skipping may occur when playingVBR (Variable Bit Rate) files. It is not recommended to play VBR files.

USB

Playback does not start when the USBdevice is connected.

There is no supported format file to playon this unit. Check the file format.

The current consumption of the USBdevice exceeds 1.0 A.

Use an USB device with a current con-sumption lower than 1.0 A.

Bluetooth®

Pairing failed

The distance between this unit and theBluetooth® ready device is too far, or ametallic object may be located betweenthe Bluetooth® ready device and this unit.

Change the location of the Bluetooth®

ready device.

The Bluetooth® function of the Blue-tooth® ready device is off.

Refer to the manual of the Bluetooth®

ready device. (Some devices have thepower saving function that automaticallyactivates after a certain time.)

Unable to receive a call. Your current location may be out of ser-vice area.

Drive your vehicle to the service area ofthe phone.

The voice quality of hands-free is low(Distortion, noise etc.).

Another wireless device may be locatednear the unit.

Switch off the wireless device or keep itaway from the unit.

Problem Possible cause Possible solution

132

Page 144: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-48

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Error Display Messages

Display Possible cause Possible solution

CD

ERROR 1 The disc cannot be read.

Insert the disc with its label side up.Check the disc if it is not warped or is free of flaws.When ERROR 1 does not disappear even when a normaldisc is inserted, contact your dealer.

ERROR 3 The player developed an error of anunidentified cause.

When the CD is in the unit, press the CD eject button toremove the disc.When the disc cannot be ejected, contact your dealer.

USB/iPod®

ERROR 1 The USB device is disconnected. Check the connection of the USB device.

ERROR 2 Impossible to communicate correctly withthe USB device.

Unplug the USB device and plug it again.Check the USB device.

ERROR 3 Inoperable due to an unidentified cause. Unplug the USB device and plug it again.When ERROR 3 does not disappear, contact your dealer.

ERROR 4 The current consumption of the USBdevice exceeds 1.0 A. Check the USB device.

133

Page 145: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

5-49

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Bluetooth®

ERROR 1 The player developed an error of anunidentified cause.

Disconnect the Bluetooth® ready device and connect itagain.When ERROR 1 does not disappear, contact your dealer.

Failed Failed to establish pairing Try to establish the pairing again.

Memory Full Reached the limit for the number of con-nected device information

Delete information of unnecessary devices and try toestablish the pairing again.

Not Avail. Inoperable during driving Operate the system after pulling over your vehicle.

Not Linked Phone is disconnected Try to establish the pairing again.

Display Possible cause Possible solution

134

Page 146: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

135

VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING Vehicle Loading ................................................................... 6-1Trailer Towing ...................................................................... 6-1Towing Your Vehicle ........................................................... 6-1

Page 147: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

6-1

VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Vehicle LoadingYour vehicle was designed for specificweight capacities. The weight capacities ofyour vehicle are indicated by the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and thePermissible maximum Axle Weight (PAW,front and rear). The GVWR and PAW (frontand rear) are listed in the “SPECIFICA-TIONS” section.

GVWR – Maximum permissible overallweight of the fully loaded vehicle (includingall the occupants, accessories and cargoplus the trailer nose weight if towing atrailer).PAW – (Front and Rear) Maximum permis-sible weight on an individual axle.

Actual weight of the loaded vehicle andactual loads at the front and rear axles canonly be determined by weighing the vehi-cle. Compare these weights to the GVWRand PAW (front and rear). If the gross vehi-cle weight or the load on either axleexceeds these ratings, you must removeenough weight to bring the load down tothe rated capacity.

Trailer TowingYour MARUTI SUZUKI was originallydesigned to carry people and a normalamount of cargo, not to tow a trailer.MAR-UTI SUZUKI does not recommend you useyour vehicle to tow a trailer. Towing a trailercan adversely affect handling, durability,and fuel economy.

Towing Your Vehicle Your vehicle may be towed behind anothervehicle (such as a motorhome), providedyour vehicle is 2 wheel drive (2WD) andyou use the proper towing method speci-fied for your vehicle. The towing methodyou must use depends on the specifica-tions of your vehicle: whether it is a manualtransaxle vehicle or an Auto Gear Shiftvehicle.

Use the towing instruction table to selectthe proper towing method for your vehicle,and carefully follow the correspondinginstructions. Be sure to use proper towingequipment designed for recreational tow-ing and make sure that towing speed doesnot exceed 90 km/h (55 mph).

WARNINGNever overload your vehicle. Thegross vehicle weight (sum of theweights of the vehicle, all the occu-pants, accessories, cargo plus trailernose weight if towing a trailer) mustnever exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR). In addition,never distribute a load so that theweight on either the front or rear axleexceeds the Permissible maximumAxle Weight (PAW).

WARNINGAlways distribute cargo evenly. Toavoid personal injury or damage toyour vehicle, always secure cargo toprevent it from shifting if the vehiclemoves suddenly. Place heavierobjects on the floor and as far for-ward in the cargo area as possible.Never pile cargo higher than the topof the seat backs.

WARNINGWhen you tow your vehicle, followthe instructions below to avoid acci-dents and damage to your vehicle. Inaddition, be sure to observe govern-ment and local requirements regard-ing vehicle lighting and trailer hitchesor tow bars.

WARNINGA safety chain should always be usedwhen you tow your vehicle.

136

Page 148: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

6-2

VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

TOWING INSTRUCTION TABLE

76MH022

A: 2WD VEHICLES WITH MANUALTRANSAXLE OR AUTO GEAR SHIFT1) Secure the front wheels on a towing

dolly according to the instructions pro-vided by the dolly manufacturer.

2) Release the parking brake.

76MH023

B: 2WD VEHICLES WITH MANUALTRANSAXLE OR AUTO GEAR SHIFT1) Shift the gearshift lever into neutral.2) Turn the ignition key to the “ACC” posi-

tion to unlock the steering wheel.3) Release the parking brake.

DRIVE TRAIN

TRAN-SAXLE

TOWING METHOD

2WDM/T A B

Auto Gear Shift A B

TOWING METHOD A

FROM THE FRONT:FRONT WHEELS ON A DOLLY AND REAR WHEELS ON THE GROUND

M/T, Auto Gear Shift

2WD

TOWING METHOD B

FROM THE FRONT:FOUR WHEELS ON THE GROUND

NOTICEAfter shifting the Auto Gear Shiftlever to the “N” position, alwayscheck the gear position indicator inthe instrument cluster shows the “N”position to make sure that thetransaxle is disengaged.If the transaxle cannot be put in neu-tral, turn the key from the “LOCK” tothe “ON” position, and move theAuto Gear Shift lever from “N” to “D”,“M” or “R”, then back to “N” again.Then turn the key from the “ON” tothe “LOCK” position.These procedures may help put thetransaxle in neutral. If the transaxlestill cannot be put in neutral, you can-not tow the vehicle without using atowing dolly.

NOTICEThe steering column is not strongenough to withstand shocks trans-mitted from the front wheels duringtowing. Always unlock the steeringwheel before towing.

137

Page 149: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

138

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Maintenance Schedule ....................................................... 7-2Periodic Maintenance Schedule ........................................ 7-2Drive Belt ............................................................................. 7-6Engine Oil and Filter ........................................................... 7-6Engine Coolant .................................................................... 7-10Air Cleaner ........................................................................... 7-12Spark Plugs ......................................................................... 7-12Gear Oil ................................................................................ 7-14Clutch Pedal ........................................................................ 7-14Fuel Filter (Diesel engine) .................................................. 7-15Brakes .................................................................................. 7-15Steering ................................................................................ 7-17Tires ...................................................................................... 7-18Battery .................................................................................. 7-19Fuses .................................................................................... 7-20Bulb Replacement ............................................................... 7-23Wiper Blades ....................................................................... 7-28Windshield Washer Fluid ................................................... 7-31Air Conditioning System .................................................... 7-31

Page 150: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

7-1

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

60A187S

WARNINGYou should take extreme care whenworking on your vehicle to preventaccidental injury. Here are a few pre-cautions that you should be espe-cially careful to observe:

(Continued)

WARNING(Continued)• To prevent damage or unintended

activation of the air bag system besure the battery is disconnectedand the ignition switch has been inthe “LOCK” position for at least 90seconds before performing anyelectrical service work on yourMARUTI SUZUKI. Do not touch airbag system components, or wires. The wires are wrapped with yellowtape or yellow tubing, and the cou-plers are yellow for easy identifica-tion.

• Do not leave the engine running ingarages or other confined areas.

• When the engine is running, keephands, clothing, tools, and otherobjects away from the fan and drivebelt. Even though the fan may notbe moving, it can automaticallyturn on without warning.

• When it is necessary to do servicework with the engine running, makesure that the parking brake is setfully and the transaxle is in Neutral.

• Do not touch ignition wires or otherignition system parts when start-ing the engine or when the engineis running, or you could receive anelectric shock.

(Continued)

WARNING(Continued)• Be careful not to touch a hot

engine, exhaust manifold andpipes, muffler, radiator and waterhoses.

• Do not allow smoking, sparks, orflames around fuel or the battery.Flammable fumes are present.

• Do not get under your vehicle if it issupported only with the portablejack provided in your vehicle.

• Be careful not to cause accidentalshort circuits between the positiveand negative battery terminals.

• Keep used oil, coolant, and otherfluids away from children and pets.Dispose of used fluids properly;never pour them on the ground,into sewers, etc.

139

Page 151: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

7-2

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Maintenance ScheduleThe following table shows the times whenyou should perform regular maintenanceon your vehicle. This table shows in miles,kilometers and months when you shouldperform inspections, adjustments, lubrica-tion and other services.

Periodic Maintenance Schedule“A” :Adjust“C”: Clean“R”: Replace or Change“I”: Inspect, clean, adjust, lubricate or

replace as necessary“L”: Lubricate“T”: Tighten to Specified Torque “O”: Rotate

NOTE:This table includes services as scheduledup to 80,000 km mileage. Beyond 80,000km, carry out the same services at thesame intervals respectively.

WARNINGMARUTI SUZUKI recommends thatmaintenance on your Maruti Suzukivehicle should be performed by MAR-UTI SUZUKI authorized workshop/Service station.

NOTICEWhenever it becomes necessary toreplace parts on your vehicle, it isrecommended that you use MARUTIgenuine replacement parts or theirequivalent.

140

Page 152: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

7-3

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Interval: This interval should be judged by odometer readingor months, whichever comes first.

FREE INSPECTION PERIODIC MAINTENANCE AT COST

km (x1000) 1 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80

months 1 6 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96

Engine

1-1. Water pump drive (Tension, Wear) Petrol - - - - - I - - - R

1-2 Engine Coolant (Level, Leakage) l l l R l R l R l R

1-3 Engine oil and engine oil filter - - R R R R R R R R

1-4 Cooling system hoses and connections (Leakage and Damage) l l l l l l l l l l

1-5 Engine bolts (All cylinder head and manifold fixings) - - T - T _ T - T -

1-6 Engine Mounting (loose, damage) - - T - T - T - T -

1-7 Valve Clearance Petrol - - - - I - - I - -

1-8 Exhaust System (Noise, Leakage or otherwise defective) - l - l - I - I - l

1-9 Positive Crank Case Ventilation System (Hoses, Connections and Valve) - l - l - I - I - l

1-10 Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve Diesel - - - - C - - C - -

Ignition

2-1. Ignition wiring (Damage, Deterioration) - - - l - l - l - l

2-2. Spark Plug (Clean and adjust the gap) Petrol - - - - - R - - - R

Fuel

3-1.Air cleaner filter element

Paved-road Clean after every 5,000 KM. Replace after every 40,000 KM.

Dusty Condition

Clean after every 2,500 KM or as required. Replace after every 40,000 KM. More frequent replacement if dust condition is severe.

3-2. Fuel tank cap, fuel lines and connections (Leakage and Damage) - l - - - l - - - l

3-3. Fuel Filter (Leakage) Petrol I I I I I I I I I R

3-4. Fuel Filter and Water Draining Diesel I I I R I R I R I R

Clutch and Transmission

4-1. Clutch Pedal (Play) Petrol I I I I I I I I I I

4-2. Clutch fluid (level, leakage) Diesel l l l R l R l R l R

4-3. Clutch slipping (Dragging or Excess Damage) l l l l l l l l l l

141

Page 153: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

7-4

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Interval: This interval should be judged by odometer readingor months, whichever comes first.

FREE INSPECTION PERIODIC MAINTENANCE AT COST

km (x1000) 1 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80

months 1 6 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96

4-4. Transmission Oil (Level, Leakage) Replace at 1,60,000 km or 10 years whichever comes first

Drive shaft

5-1. Drive shaft boot (boot cut / damage) - l l l l l l l l l

5-2. Noise from drive shafts I I I I I I I I I I

BRAKE

6-1. Brake Fluid (Level, Leakage) I I I R I R I R I R

6-2. Brake pedal (pedal - carpet clearance) I I I I I I I I I I

6-3. Parking brake lever and cable (Play, damage) I I I I I I I I I I

6-4. Brake disc and pad (Wear) – I I I I I I I I I

6-5. Brake drum and shoes (Wear) – – I I I I I I I I

6-6. Master cylinder and wheel cylinder or caliper, brake hoses and pipes (Fluidleakage, damage) I I I I I I I I I I

WHEEL

7-1. Tyres (air pressure, abnormal wear, crack and rotation) I I&O I&O I&O I&O I&O I&O I&O I&O I&O

7-2. Wheels (Damage) I I I I I I I I I I

7-3. Front/Rear wheel bearing (Loose, damage) – I I I I I I I I I

FRONT / REAR SUSPENSION

8-1. Suspension strut (Oil leakage, damage) I I I I I I I I I I

8-2. Suspension arms / Knuckle support (Loose, damage) – I I I I I I I I I

8-3. Rear spring (Damage) – I I I I I I I I I

8-4. Shock absorbers (Oil leakage, damage) I I I I I I I I I I

8-5. All bolts and nuts (Loose) – T T T T T T T T T

8-6. Suspension arms and torsion rods – I I I I I I I I I

STEERING

9-1. Steering wheel (Play, loose) I I I I I I I I I I

9-2. All rods and arms (Loose, damage, wear) I I I I I I I I I I

142

Page 154: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

7-5

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Interval: This interval should be judged by odometer readingor months, whichever comes first.

FREE INSPECTION PERIODIC MAINTENANCE AT COST

km (x1000) 1 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80

months 1 6 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96

ELECTRICAL

10-1. Battery electrolyte (Level, leakage) I I I I I I I I I I

10-2. Wiring harness connection (Loose, damage) – I I I I I I I I I

10-3. Lightening system (Operation, stains, damage) I I I I I I I I I I

10-4. Horn (Operation) I I I I I I I I I I

10-5. System Voltage I I I I I I I I I I

BODY

11-1. All chassis bolts and nuts (Tighten) – I T T T T T T T T

11-2. All latches, hinges and locks (Function)) I I&L I&L I&L I&L I&L I&L I&L I&L I&L

ROAD TEST

12-1. Operation of Brakes, gear shifting and speedometer I I I I I I I I I I

12-2. Body and chassis noise I I I I I I I I I I

AIR CONDITIONER (If equipped)

13-1. Check belt tension I I I I I I I I I I

13-2. Tighten compressor mounting bolt – T T T T T T T T T

13-3. All hose joint (Check, tighten) I I I I I I I I I I

13-4. Check functioning of Recirc flap I I I I I I I I I I

13-5. Clean condenser with low pressure water – C C C C C C C C C

13-6. Check belt for frayed edges – I I I I I I I I I

13-7. Check all mounting bolts – I I I I I I I I I

143

Page 155: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

7-6

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Drive Belt

Make sure the drive belt tension is correct.If the belt is too loose, insufficient batterycharging, engine overheating, poor powersteering, poor air conditioning, or exces-sive belt wear can result. When you pressthe belt with your thumb midway betweenthe pulleys, there should be a deflectionaccording to the following chart.

The belts should also be examined toensure that they are not damaged.

If you need to replace or adjust the belthave it done by your MARUTI SUZUKIdealer.

(For Petrol Engine Model)

51KM036

(For Diesel Engine Model)The drive belts tension adjusted automati-cally.

Engine Oil and FilterSpecified Oil(For Petrol Engine Model)

68LM20702

(1) Preferred

Be sure that the engine oil you use comesunder the quality classification of SL.Select the appropriate oil viscosity accord-ing to the above chart.

SAE 0W-20 (1) is the best choice for goodfuel economy, and good starting in coldweather.

WARNINGWhen the engine is running, keephands, hair, clothing, tools, etc. awayfrom the moving fan and drive belts.

: 100 N (10 kg, 22 lbs) pressGE: GeneratorDEF: DeflectionAC: Air conditioner compressor

DEF: 4.0 – 4.5 mm (0.16 – 0.18 in.)

GE

AC

DEF: 7 – 8 mm (0.28 – 0.31 in.)

CFoo -30-22

-20-4

-1014 32 50 68 86 104

0 10 20 30 40

(1)

0W-20

144

Page 156: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

7-7

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

(For Diesel Engine Model)

76MH024

(1) Preferred

Be sure that the engine oil you use comesunder the quality classification of ACEAA5/B5-10. Select the appropriate oil vis-cosity according to the above chart.

Oil Level Check

76MH030

(1) Engine oil dipstick (Petrol engine)(2) Engine oil dipstick (Diesel engine)

It is important to keep the engine oil at thecorrect level for proper lubrication of yourvehicle’s engine. Check the oil level withthe vehicle on a level surface. The oil levelindication may be inaccurate if the vehicleis on a slope. The oil level should bechecked either before starting the engineor at least 5 minutes after stopping theengine.

The handle of the engine oil dipstick is col-ored yellow for easy identification.

52D084

Pull out the oil dipstick, wipe oil off with aclean cloth, insert the dipstick all the wayinto the engine, then remove it again. Theoil on the stick should be between theupper and lower limits shown on the stick.If the oil level indication is near the lowerlimit, add enough oil to raise the level to theupper limit.

(1)

-30-22 -4 14 32 50 68 86 104

-20 -10 10 20 30 400

5W-30

(1)

(2)

EXAMPLE

NOTICEFailure to check the oil level regularlycould lead to serious engine troubledue to insufficient oil.

EXAMPLE UpperLower

145

Page 157: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

7-8

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Refilling

81A147

Remove the oil filler cap and pour oil slowlythrough the filler hole to bring the oil levelto the upper limit on the dipstick. Be carefulnot to overfill. Too much oil is almost asbad as too little oil. After refilling, start theengine and allow it to idle for about a min-ute. Stop the engine, wait about 5 minutesand check the oil level again.

Changing Engine Oil and FilterDrain the engine oil while the engine is stillwarm.

76MH037

(1) Engine oil filler cap (Petrol engine)(2) Engine oil filler cap (Diesel engine)

1) Remove the oil filler cap.2) Place a drain pan under the drain plug.3) Using a wrench, remove the drain plug

and drain out the engine oil.

68KH068

Tightening torque for drain plug (1):Petrol engine:

35 Nm (3.6 kg-m, 25.8 lb-ft)Diesel engine:

35 Nm (3.6 kg-m, 25.8 lb-ft)

NOTICE(For Diesel Engine Model)Do not top up the oil over the MAXlimit. Too much oil causes seriousengine trouble.

CloseOpen

EXAMPLE

CAUTIONThe engine oil temperature may behigh enough to burn your fingerswhen the drain plug is loosened. Waituntil the drain plug is cool enough totouch with your bare hands.

(2)

(1)

Open Close

EXAMPLE

WARNINGNew and used oil can be hazardous.Children and pets may be harmed byswallowing new or used oil. Keepnew and used oil and used oil filtersaway from children and pets.Repeated, prolonged contact withused engine oil may cause skin can-cer.Brief contact with used oil may irri-tate skin.

(Continued)

(1)

EXAMPLE

146

Page 158: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

7-9

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

4) Reinstall the drain plug and gasket.Tighten the plug with a wrench to thespecified torque.

Replace the Oil Filter1) Using an oil filter wrench, turn the oil fil-

ter counterclockwise and remove it.2) Using a clean rag, wipe off the mount-

ing surface on the engine where thenew filter will be seated.

3) Smear a little engine oil around the rub-ber gasket of the new oil filter.

4) Screw on the new filter by hand until thefilter gasket contacts the mounting sur-face.

(For Petrol Engine Model)

54G092

(1) Loosen(2) Tighten

Tightening (viewed from filter top)

82JN146

(1) Oil filter(2) 1 turn

(For Diesel Engine Model)

76MH031

(1) Loosen(2) Tighten

Tightening (viewed from filter top)

54G093

(1) Oil filter(2) 3/4 turn

WARNING(Continued)To minimize your exposure to usedoil, wear a long-sleeve shirt andmoisture-proof gloves (such as dish-washing gloves) when changing oil. Ifoil contacts your skin, wash thor-oughly with soap and water.Launder any clothing or rags if wetwith oil.Recycle or properly dispose of usedoil and filters.

(1)

(2)

(1)(2)

147

Page 159: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

7-10

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

5) Tighten the filter specified turn from thepoint of contact with the mounting sur-face (or to the specified torque) usingan oil filter wrench.

Tightening torque for oil filterPetrol engine:

1 turn or 14 Nm (1.4 kg-m, 10.3 lb-ft)

Diesel engine: 3/4 turn or 14 Nm (1.4 kg-m, 10.3 lb-ft)

Refill with Oil and Check for Leaks1) Pour oil through the filler hole and

install the filler cap. For the approximate capacity of the oil,refer to the “CAPACITIES” item in the“SPECIFICATIONS” section.

2) Start the engine and look carefully forleaks at the oil filter and drain plug. Runthe engine at various speeds for at least5 minutes.

3) Stop the engine and wait about 5 min-utes. Check the oil level again and addoil if necessary. Check for leaks again.

Engine CoolantSelection of CoolantTo maintain optimum performance anddurability of your engine, use MARUTIGenuine Coolant or equivalent.This type of coolant is best for your coolingsystem as it:• Helps maintain proper engine tempera-

ture.• Gives proper protection against freezing

and boiling.• Gives proper protection against corro-

sion and rust.Failure to use the proper coolant can dam-age your cooling system. Your authorized

MARUTI SUZUKI dealer can help youselect the proper coolant.

Coolant Level CheckCheck the coolant level at the reservoirtank, not at the radiator. With the enginecool, the coolant level should be betweenthe “FULL” and “LOW” marks.

NOTICETo tighten the oil filter properly, it isImportant to accurately identify theposition at which the filter gasketfirst contacts the mounting surface.

NOTICETo prevent oil leakage, make surethat the oil filter is tight, but do notover-tighten it.

NOTICE• When replacing the oil filter, it is rec-

ommended that you use a Marutigenuine replacement filter. If youuse an after market filter, make sureit is of equivalent quality and followthe manufacturer’s instructions.

• Oil leaks from around the oil filteror drain plug indicate incorrectinstallation or gasket damage. Ifyou find any leaks or are not surethat the filter has been properlytightened, have the vehicleinspected by your MARUTI SUZUKIdealer.

NOTICETo avoid damaging your cooling sys-tem:• Always use a high quality ethylene

glycol base non-silicate type cool-ant diluted with distilled water atthe correct mixture concentration.

• Make sure that the proper mix is 50/50 coolant to distilled water (Die-sel) and 30/70 (Petrol). Concentra-tions greater than this may causeoverheating conditions.

• Neither use 100% coolant nor 100%Plain water.

• Do not add extra inhibitors or addi-tives. They may not be compatiblewith your cooling system.

• Do not mix different types of basecoolants. Doing so may result inaccelerated seal wear and/or thepossibility of severe overheatingand extensive engine damage.

148

Page 160: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

7-11

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Adding Coolant (For Petrol Engine Model)

76MH0A107

76MH0A108

If the coolant level is below the “LOW”mark, more coolant should be added.Remove the reservoir tank cap and addcoolant until the reservoir tank levelreaches the “FULL” mark. Never fill the res-ervoir tank above the “FULL” mark.

(For Diesel Engine Model)

76MH032

If the coolant level is below the “LOW”mark, more coolant should be added.When the engine is cool, remove thedegassing tank cap by turning it anticlock-wise slowly to release any pressure. Andadd coolant until the degassing tank levelreaches the “FULL” mark. Never fill thedegassing tank above the “FULL” mark.

WARNINGEngine coolant is harmful or fatal ifswallowed or inhaled. Do not drinkantifreeze or coolant solution. If swal-lowed, do not induce vomiting. Imme-diately contact a poison controlcenter or a physician. Avoid inhalingmist or hot vapors; if inhaled, removeto fresh air. If coolant gets in eyes,flush eyes with water and seek medi-cal attention. Wash thoroughly afterhandling. Solution can be poisonousto animals. Keep out of the reach ofchildren and animals.

NOTICE• The mixture you use should con-

tain 30% concentration of anti-freeze.

• If the lowest ambient temperaturein your area is expected to be –35°C (–31°F) or below, use higherconcentrations up to 60% followingthe instructions on the antifreezecontainer.

EXAMPLE

FULL

LOW

WARNINGIt is hazardous to remove the reser-voir tank cap (degassing tank cap) fora diesel engine when the water tem-perature is high, because scaldingfluid and steam may be blown outunder pressure. Wait until the coolanttemperature has lowered beforeremoving the cap.

FULL

LOW

149

Page 161: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

7-12

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Coolant ReplacementSince special procedures are required, werecommend you take your vehicle to yourMARUTI SUZUKI dealer for coolantreplacement.

Air CleanerIf the air cleaner is clogged with dust, therewill be greater intake resistance, resultingin decreased power output and increasedfuel consumption.

(For Petrol Engine Model)

76MH0A109

Unclamp the upper clamps, and removethe element from the air cleaner case. If itappears to be dirty, replace it with a newone.

(For Diesel Engine Model)

76MH033

Unclamp the side clamps, and remove theelement from the air cleaner case. If itappears to be dirty, replace it with a newone.

Spark Plugs

76MH0A109

68KH072

For nickel spark plugs (traditional type):You should inspect spark plugs periodicallyfor carbon deposits. When carbon accu-mulates on a spark plug, a strong sparkmay not be produced. Remove carbondeposits with a wire or pin and adjust thespark plug gap.

To access the spark plugs:1) Unclamp and remove the bolt, then

remove the air cleaner case.2) If necessary, disconnect the coupler (1)

while pushing the release lever.3) Remove the bolts.4) Pull the ignition coils out.

NOTE:When installation, make sure the wires,couplers, sealing rubber of top cover andwashers, are correctly returned in place.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

(1)

EXAMPLE

150

Page 162: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

7-13

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

78K179 60G160S 60B307

Spark plug gap “a”NGK KR6A-10: 0.95 – 1.05 mm (0.037 – 0.041 in.)

NOTICE• When pulling the ignition coils out,

do not pull on the cable. Pulling onthe cable can damage it.

• When servicing the iridium/plati-num spark plugs (slender centerelectrode type plugs), do not touchthe center electrode, as it is easy todamage.

Correct Wrong

EXAMPLE

NOTICE• When installing the spark plugs,

screw them in with your fingers toavoid stripping the threads.Tighten with a torque wrench to17.5 Nm (1.8 kg-m, 12.9 lb-ft). Donot allow contaminants to enter theengine through the spark plugholes when the plugs are removed.

• Never use spark plugs with thewrong thread size.

Loosen

Tighten

NOTICEWhen replacing spark plugs, youshould use the brand and type speci-fied for your vehicle. For the speci-fied plugs, refer to the“SPECIFICATIONS” section at theend of this book. If you wish to use abrand of spark plug other than thespecified plugs, consult your MAR-UTI SUZUKI dealer.

151

Page 163: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

7-14

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Gear OilManual Transaxle Oil/Auto Gear Shift OilWhen adding gear oil, use gear oil with theappropriate viscosity and grade as shownin the chart below.

We highly recommend you use:“MARUTI SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W-80” formanual transaxle gear oil or Auto GearShift oil.

Manual transaxle oil (API GL-4)

68LM728

Gear Oil Level Check

68KH073

(1) Oil filler and level plug

To check the gear oil level, use the follow-ing procedure:

1) Park the vehicle on a level surface withthe parking brake applied. Then, stopthe engine.

2) Remove the oil filler plug (1).3) Check the inside of the hole with your

finger. If the oil level comes up to thebottom of the plug hole, the oil level iscorrect. If so, reinstall the plug.

4) If the oil level is low, add gear oilthrough the oil filler plug hole (1) untilthe oil level reaches the bottom of thefiller hole, then reinstall the plug.

Tightening torque (1):21 Nm (2.1 kg-m, 15.5 lb-ft)

Gear Oil ChangeSince special procedures, materials andtools are required, it is recommended thatyou trust this job to your authorized MAR-UTI SUZUKI dealer.

Clutch PedalCable control clutch (if equipped)

54G274

Clutch pedal play “d”:10 - 15 mm (0.4 - 0.6 in.)

CFo

o -30-22

-20-4

-1014 32 50 68 86 104

0 10 20 30 40

75W-80

(1)

EXAMPLE

CAUTIONAfter driving the vehicle, thetransaxle oil temperature may behigh enough to burn your skin. Waituntil the oil filler plug is cool enoughto touch with your bare hands beforeinspecting transaxle oil.

NOTICEWhen tightening the plug, apply thefollowing sealing compound orequivalent to the plug threads to pre-vent oil leakage.

Manual transaxle sealant:MARUTI SUZUKI Bond No. “1216E”or “1217G”

EXAMPLE

152

Page 164: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

7-15

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Measure the clutch pedal play by movingthe clutch pedal with your hand and mea-suring the distance it moves until you feelslight resistance. The play in the clutchpedal should be between the specified val-ues. If the play is more or less than theabove, or clutch dragging is felt with thepedal fully depressed, have the clutchinspected by your MARUTI SUZUKIdealer.

Fluid Control Clutch (if equipped)

76MH034

Check the clutch pedal for smooth opera-tion and clutch fluid level from time to time.If clutch dragging is felt with the pedal fullydepressed, have the clutch inspected byyour MARUTI SUZUKI dealer. If the clutchfluid level is near the “MIN” line, fill it up tothe “MAX” line with Maruti genuine brakefluid.

Fuel Filter (Diesel engine)

76MH035

The fuel filter works as a water sedimentoras well.

Drain water according to the PeriodicMaintenance Schedule. To drain water:1) Place a pan or ample rag under the fuel

filter drain nozzle.2) Loosen the drain screw (1). The water

will be drained.3) Tighten the drain screw when the water

changes to the diesel fuel.4) Tighten the drain knob.

Tightening torque for drain screw1.0 Nm (0.10 kg-m, 0.74 lb-ft)

BrakesBrake Fluid(For Petrol Engine Model)

76MH0A110

(For Diesel Engine Model)

76MH034

Check the brake fluid level by looking atthe reservoir in the engine compartment.Check that the fluid level is between the

(1)

153

Page 165: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

7-16

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

“MAX” and “MIN” lines. If the brake fluidlevel is near the “MIN” line, fill it up to the“MAX” line with Maruti genuine brake fluid.

NOTE:With disc brakes, the fluid level can beexpected to gradually fall as the brakepads wear.

Brake PedalCheck if the brake pedal stops at the regu-lar height without “spongy” feeling whenyou depress it. If not, have the brake sys-tem inspected by your MARUTI SUZUKIdealer. If you doubt the brake pedal for theregular height, check it as follows:

54G108

Pedal to floor carpet minimum dis-tance “a”:66 mm (2.6 in.)

With the engine running, measure the dis-tance between the brake pedal and floorcarpet when the pedal is depressed withapproximately 30 kg (66 lbs) of force. Theminimum distance required is as specified.Since your vehicle’s brake system is self-adjusting, there is no need for pedaladjustment. If the pedal to floor carpet distance asmeasured above is less than the minimumdistance required, have your vehicleinspected by your MARUTI SUZUKIdealer.

WARNINGFailure to follow the guidelines belowcan result in personal injury or seri-ous damage to the brake system.• If the brake fluid in the reservoir

drops below a certain level, thebrake warning light on the instru-ment panel will come on (theengine must be running with theparking brake fully disengaged).Should the light come on, immedi-ately ask your MARUTI SUZUKIdealer to inspect the brake system.

• A rapid fluid loss indicates a leak inthe brake system which should beinspected by your MARUTI SUZUKIdealer immediately.

• Do not use any fluid other thanMaruti genuine brake fluid. Do notuse reclaimed fluid or fluid that hasbeen stored in old or open contain-ers. It is essential that foreign parti-cles and other liquids are kept outof the brake fluid reservoir.

CAUTIONBrake fluid can harm your eyes anddamage painted surfaces. Use cau-tion when refilling the reservoir.

WARNINGBrake fluid is harmful or fatal if swal-lowed, and harmful if it comes in con-tact with skin or eyes. If swallowed,do not induce vomiting. Immediatelycontact a poison control center or aphysician. If brake fluid gets in eyes,flush eyes with water and seek medi-cal attention. Wash thoroughly afterhandling. Solution can be poisonousto animals. Keep out of the reach ofchildren and animals.

154

Page 166: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

7-17

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

NOTE:When measuring the distance between thebrake pedal and floor wall, be sure not toinclude the floor mat or rubber on the floorwall in your measurement.

60G104S

Parking Brake

54G109

Ratchet tooth specification “b”: 4th – 9thLever pull force (1):200 N (20 kg, 45 lbs)

Check the parking brake for proper adjust-ment by counting the number of clicksmade by the ratchet teeth as you slowlypull up on the parking brake lever to thepoint of full engagement. The parkingbrake lever should stop between the speci-fied ratchet teeth and the rear wheelsshould be securely locked. If the parkingbrake is not properly adjusted or thebrakes drag after the lever has been fullyreleased, have the parking brake inspectedand/or adjusted by your MARUTI SUZUKIdealer.

Steering

68LM708

Steering wheel play “c”: 0 – 30 mm (0.0 – 1.2 in.)

Check the play of the steering wheel bygently turning it from left to right and mea-suring the distance that it moves beforeyou feel slight resistance. The play shouldbe between the specified values.

Check that the steering wheel turns easilyand smoothly without rattling by turning itall the way to the right and to the left whiledriving very slowly in an open area. If theamount of free play is outside the specifi-cation or you find anything else to bewrong, an inspection must be performedby your MARUTI SUZUKI dealer.

WARNINGIf you experience any of the followingproblems with your vehicle’s brakesystem, have the vehicle inspectedimmediately by your MARUTI SUZUKIdealer.• Poor braking performance• Uneven braking (brakes not work-

ing uniformly on all wheels.)• Excessive pedal travel• Brake dragging• Excessive noise• Pedal pulsation (pedal pulsates

when depressed.)

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

“c”

EXAMPLE

155

Page 167: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

7-18

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Tires

68KH075

The front and rear tire pressure specifica-tions for your vehicle are listed on the TireInformation Label. Both the front and reartires should have the specified tire pres-sure.Note that the value does not apply to thecompact spare tire, if equipped.

Tire InspectionInspect your vehicle’s tires at least once amonth by performing the following checks:

1) Measure the air pressure with a tiregauge. Adjust the pressure if neces-sary. Remember to check the sparetire, too.

52KM110

(1) Tread wear indicator(2) Indicator location mark

2) Check that the depth of the treadgroove is more than 1.6 mm (0.06 in.).To help you check this, the tires havemolded-in tread wear indicators in thegrooves. When the indicators appearon the tread surface, the remainingdepth of the tread is 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)or less and the tire should be replaced.

3) Check for abnormal wear, cracks anddamage. Any tires with cracks or otherdamage should be replaced. If any tiresshow abnormal wear, have theminspected by your MARUTI SUZUKIdealer.

4) Check for loose wheel nuts.5) Check that there are no nails, stones or

other objects sticking into the tires.

EXAMPLE

WARNING• Air pressures should be checked

when the tires are cold or you mayget inaccurate readings.

• Check the inflation pressure fromtime to time while inflating the tiregradually, until the specified pres-sure is obtained.

• Never under inflate or over inflatethe tires. Under inflation can cause unusualhandling characteristics or cancause the rim to slip on the tirebead, resulting in an accident ordamage to the tire or rim.

• Overinflation can cause the tire toburst, resulting in personal injury.Overinflation can also causeunusual handling characteristicswhich may result in an accident.

(1)

(2)

EXAMPLE

CAUTIONHitting curbs and running over rockscan damage tires and affect wheelalignment. Be sure to have tires andwheel alignment checked periodi-cally by your MARUTI SUZUKI dealer.

156

Page 168: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

7-19

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Tire Rotation5-tire rotation and 4-tire rotation

80JK040

To avoid uneven wear of your tires and toprolong their life, rotate the tires as illus-trated. Tires should be rotated as men-tioned in periodic maintenance schedule.After rotation, adjust front and rear tirepressures to the specification listed onyour vehicle’s Tire Information Label.

Wheel Balancing

If the vehicle vibrates abnormally onsmooth road, have the wheel balanced atMARUTI SUZUKI Authorized Workshop

Wheel Alignment

In case of abnormal tire wear or pullingtowards one side, have the wheel alignedat MARUTI SUZUKI Authorized Workshop.

BatteryWARNING

• This is important to ensure propersteering and handling of the vehi-cle. Never mix tires of different sizeor type on the four wheels of yourvehicle. The size and type of tiresused should be only thoseapproved by MARUTI SUZUKI asstandard or optional equipment foryour vehicle.

• Replacing the wheels and tiresequipped on your vehicle with cer-tain combinations of aftermarketwheels and tires can significantlychange the steering and handlingcharacteristics of your vehicle.

• Therefore, use only those wheeland tire combinations approved byMARUTI SUZUKI as standard oroptional equipment for your vehi-cle.

NOTICEReplacing the original tires with tiresof a different size may result in falsespeedometer or odometer readings.

WARNING• Batteries produce flammable

hydrogen gas. Keep flames andsparks away from the battery or anexplosion may occur. Never smokewhen working in the vicinity of thebattery.

• When checking or servicing thebattery, disconnect the negativecable. Be careful not to cause ashort circuit by allowing metalobjects to contact the battery postsand the vehicle at the same time.

• To avoid harm to yourself or dam-age to your vehicle or battery, fol-low the jump starting instructionsin the “EMERGENCY SERVICE”section of this manual if it is neces-sary to jump start your vehicle.

157

Page 169: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

7-20

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

76MH0A136

For maintenance-free battery (cap-lesstype), you need not add water. For tradi-tional type battery, which has water fillercaps, the level of the battery solution mustbe kept between the “MAX” and the “MIN”level lines at all times. If the level is found tobe below the “MIN” level line, add distilledwater to the “MAX” level line. You shouldperiodically check the battery, battery termi-nals, and battery hold-down bracket for cor-rosion. Remove corrosion using a stiff brushand ammonia mixed with water, or bakingsoda mixed with water. After removing cor-rosion, rinse with clean water.

If your vehicle is not going to be driven for amonth or longer, disconnect the cable fromthe negative terminal of the battery to helpprevent discharge.

Replacement of the battery

51KM039

To remove the battery: (1) Disconnect the negative cable (1).(2) Disconnect the positive cable (2).(3) Remove the retainer nuts (3) andremove the retainer (4)(4) Remove the battery.

To install the battery:(1) Install the battery in the reverse orderof removal. (2) Tighten the retainer nuts and batterycables securely.

NOTE:When the battery is disconnected, some ofthe vehicle’s function will be initialized and/or deactivated.These function are required to reset afterthe battery is reconnected.

FusesYour vehicle has three types of fuses, asdescribed below:

Main fuseThe main fuse takes current directly fromthe battery.

Primary fusesThese fuses are between the main fuseand individual fuses, and are for electricalload groups.

Individual fusesThese fuses are for individual electrical cir-cuits.

Fuses in the Engine Compartment

68KH076

CAUTIONDo not overfill the battery with dis-tilled water in order to avoid spillage.

EXAMPLE - 1 EXAMPLE - 2(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

EXAMPLE

(1)

(2)

(3)

(27)

(28)

158

Page 170: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

7-21

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

68KH077

76MH036

The main fuse, primary fuses and some ofthe individual fuses are located in theengine compartment. If the main fuseblows, no electrical component will func-tion. If a primary fuse blows, no electricalcomponent in the corresponding loadgroup will function. When replacing themain fuse, a primary fuse or an individualfuse, use a Maruti genuine replacement.

MAIN FUSE/PRIMARY FUSE

(1)80A FL1 (PETROL)

120A FL1 (DIESEL)

(4)

(24) (25) (26)

(13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23)

(10)

(11)

(12)

(5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

(29)

(30)

(31)

(32)

(33)

(34)

(35)

(36)

(2)50A FL5 (PETROL)

40A FL5 (DIESEL)

(3) 50A FL4

(4) – Front fog light relay

(5) – Glow plug relay

(6) – Blank

(7) – Air compressor relay

(8) – Back up relay

(9) – F/P relay

(10) 40A ABS motor

(11)40A T/M pump (PETROL)

40A IGN2 (DIESEL)

(12) 40A Power steering

(13) 20A Front fog light

(14)7.5A T/M 2 (PETROL)

25A F/P (DIESEL)

(15) 30A Ignition switch

(16) 10A Air compressor

(17)15A FI (PETROL)

30A FI (DIESEL)

(18)10A T/M (PETROL)

10A EPI (DIESEL)

(19) 15A Headlight (Right)

(20) 25A ABS control module

(21) 15A Headlight (Left)

(22) 30A Starting motor

(23) 30A Radiator fan

(24)– FI main relay (PETROL)

– Glow plug 2 relay (DIESEL)

(25) – Starting motor relay

(26) – Radiator fan relay

(27)80A FL3 (PETROL)

100A FL3 (DIESEL)

(28)80A FL2 (PETROL)

100A FL2 (DIESEL)

(29) 20A Glow plug

(30) 20A Glow plug 2

(31) – FI main relay

(32) – Blank

(33) 15A FI2

(34) 20A INJ DRV

(35) – Blank

(36) – Blank

159

Page 171: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

7-22

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

To remove a fuse, use the fuse puller pro-vided in the fuse box. The amperage ofeach fuse is shown in the back of the fusebox cover.

60G111

NOTE:Make sure that the fuse box always carriesspare fuses.

Fuses under the Dash Board

68KH078

76MH0A111

WARNINGIf the main fuse or a primary fuseblows, be sure to have your vehicleinspected by an authorized MARUTISUZUKI dealer. Always use a Marutigenuine replacement. Never use asubstitute such as a wire even for atemporary repair, or extensive electri-cal damage and a fire can result.

EXAMPLE

BLOWN

OK

EXAMPLE

(7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)

(19)(14)(13) (15) (16) (17) (18) (20)

(23)

(24)

(21)

(22)

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

160

Page 172: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

7-23

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

The fuse box is located under the driver’sside of the dashboard.Remove the fuse box cover by pushing inat both ends and pulling off the cover.

81A283

Bulb ReplacementMAIN FUSE/PRIMARY FUSE

(1) 10A Stop light

(2) 30A Blower motor

(3) 10A ST SIG

(4) 15A Accessory

(5) 10A Rear fog light

(6) 10A Tail light

(7) 10A Back-up light

(8) 10A ABS

(9) 10A Meter

(10) 15A Ignition coil

(11) 20A Wiper/Washer

(12) 10A IG2 SIG

(13) 10A IG1 SIG

(14) 10A Air bag

(15) 20A Power window timer

(16) 20A Door lock

(17) 15A Horn/Hazard

(18) 20A Rear defogger

(19) 15A Dome

(20) 30A Power window

(21) 7.5A ACC 2

(22) 15A Radio 2

(23) – Blank

(24) – Blank

WARNINGAlways be sure to replace a blownfuse with a fuse of the correct amper-age. Never use a substitute such asaluminum foil or wire to replace ablown fuse. If you replace a fuse andthe new one blows in a short periodof time, you may have a major electri-cal problem. Have your vehicleinspected immediately by your MAR-UTI SUZUKI dealer.

BLOWNOK

CAUTION• Light bulbs can be hot enough to

burn your finger right after beingturned off. This is true especiallyfor halogen headlight bulbs.Replace the bulbs after theybecome cool enough.

• The headlight bulbs are filled withpressurized halogen gas. They canburst and injure you if they are hitor dropped. Handle them carefully.

NOTICEThe oils from your skin may cause ahalogen bulb to overheat and burstwhen the lights are on. Grasp a newbulb with a clean cloth.

NOTICEFrequent replacement of a bulb indi-cates the need for an inspection ofthe electrical system. This should becarried out by your MARUTI SUZUKIdealer.

161

Page 173: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

7-24

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

HeadlightsHalogen headlights (1)

76MH0A112

76MH0A113

1) Open the engine hood. Disconnect thecoupler (2). Remove the sealing rubber(3).

76MH0A114

2) Push the retaining spring (4) forwardand unhook it. Then remove the bulb(5). Install a new bulb in the reverseorder of removal.

76MH0A115

NOTE:You can see the position of retaining springfrom the hole of headlight.

Side Turn Signal Light (if equipped)

76MH0A006

1) Remove the light housing (1) by slidingto left with your finger.

76MH0A007

2) Turn the bulb holder (2) clockwise andpull it out from the light housing.

(1)

(3)

(2)

EXAMPLE

(4)

(5)

EXAMPLE

(1)

(2)

162

Page 174: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

7-25

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

76MH0A008

(4) Removal(5) Install

3) To remove and install the bulb of theturn signal light (3), simply pull out orpush in the bulb.

Front Turn Signal Light (1)Front Position Light (2)

76MH0A116

76MH0A117

1) Open the engine hood. To remove thebulb holder of the front turn signal light(1) or the front position light (2) from thelight housing, turn the holder counter-clockwise and pull it out.

61MM0B078

(3) Removal(4) Install

2) To remove the bulb of the front turn sig-nal light (1) from the bulb holder, pushin the bulb and turn it counterclockwise.To install a new bulb, push it in and turnit clockwise.To remove and install the bulb of thefront position light (2), simply pull out orpush in the bulb.

Front Fog Light (if equipped)1) Start the engine. Turn the steering

wheel to the opposite side of the replac-ing fog light to replace the bulb easily.Then turn off the engine.

76MH0A119

2) Remove the clips (1) by prying it off witha flat blade screwdriver as shown in theillustration.

(3)

(4)

(5)

(1)

(2)

(2)

(1)

(2)

(1)

(3)

(4)

EXAMPLE

(1)

EXAMPLE

163

Page 175: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

7-26

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

76MH0A120

3) Open the end of the cover inside thefender.

80JM071

4) Disconnect the coupler by pushing thelock release. Turn the bulb holder coun-terclockwise and remove it.

Rear Combination Light

76MH0A121

1) Remove the bolts (1) and pull the lighthousing (2) straight.

76MH0A122

2) To remove the bulb holder of the tail/brake light (3), the turn signal light (4) or

the reversing light (5) from the lighthousing, turn the holder counterclock-wise and pull it out.

76MH0A123

(6) Removal(7) Install

3) To remove the bulb of the tail/brake light(3), the turn signal light (4) or thereversing light (5) from bulb holder,push in the the bulb and turn it counter-clockwise. To install a new bulb, push itin and turn it clockwise.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

(2)

(1)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(3) / (4) / (5)(6)

(7)

EXAMPLE

164

Page 176: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

7-27

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

76MH0A124

NOTE:When reinstalling the light housing, makesure the clips are properly attached.

License Plate Light

76MH0A125

1) Turn the cover (1) counterclockwise toremove it.

76MH0A126

2) To remove and install the bulb of thelicense plate light (2), simply pull out orpush in the bulb.

High-mount Stop Light

80J100

1) Open the tailgate, and remove the nuts(1) as shown in the illustration.

76MH0A127

2) Close the tailgate. Remove the high-mount stop light housing (2) from thetailgate.

68KS063

3) Remove the bulb holder as shown inthe illustration.

(1)

(2)

(1) EXAMPLE

(2)

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

165

Page 177: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

7-28

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

76MH0A128

(4) Removal(5) Install

4) To remove and install the bulb of thehigh-mount stop light (3), simply pull outor push in the bulb.

Interior LightRemove the lens by using a flat bladescrewdriver covered with a soft cloth asshown. To install it, simply push it back in.

Type A

60G115

Type B

76MH0A139

Wiper Blades

54G129

If the wiper blades become brittle or dam-aged, or make streaks when wiping,replace the wiper blades.

To install new wiper blades, follow the pro-cedures below.

(3)

(4)

(5)

EXAMPLE

NOTICETo avoid scratching or breaking thewindow, do not let the wiper armstrike the window while replacing thewiper blade.

166

Page 178: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

7-29

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

NOTE:Some wiper blades may be different fromthe ones described here depending onvehicle specifications. If so, consult yourMARUTI SUZUKI dealer for properreplacement method.

For windshield wipers:

70G119

1) Hold the wiper arm away from the win-dow.

54G130

2) Squeeze lock (1) towards wiper arm (2)and remove the wiper frame from thearm as shown.

3) Unlock the lock end of the wiper bladeand slide the blade out as shown.

Removal

60A260

Installation

54G132

(1) Locked end

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

167

Page 179: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

7-30

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

54G135

(1) Retainer

4) If the new blade is provided without thetwo metal retainers, move them fromthe old blade to the new one.

60MH071

60MH072

(A) Up(B) Down

NOTE:When you install the metal retainers (3),make sure the direction of metal retainersas shown in the above illustrations.

5) Install the new blade in the reverseorder of removal, with the locked endpositioned toward the wiper arm. Make sure the blade is properlyretained by all the hooks. Lock theblade end into place.

6) Reinstall wiper frame to arm, makingsure that the lock lever is snappedsecurely into the arm.

For rear wipers:

80G146

1) Hold the wiper arm away from the win-dow.

2) Remove the wiper frame from the armas shown.

3) Slide the blade out as shown.

(3)

(3)

EXAMPLE

(3)

(A)

(B)

EXAMPLE

168

Page 180: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

7-31

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

65D151

NOTE:Do not flex the wiper blade frame endmore than necessary. If you do, it canbreak off.

54G135

(1) Retainer

4) If the new blade is provided without thetwo metal retainers, move them fromthe old blade to the new one.

5) Install the new blade in the reverseorder of removal. Make sure the blade is properlyretained by all the hooks.

6) Reinstall wiper frame to arm in thereverse order of removal.

Windshield Washer FluidFront

80JM078

Check that there is washer fluid in the tank.Refill it if necessary. Use a good qualitywindshield washer fluid, diluted with wateras necessary.

Air Conditioning SystemIf you do not use the air conditioner for along period, such as during winter, it maynot give the best performance when youstart using it again. To help maintain opti-mum performance and durability of your airconditioner, it needs to be run periodically.Operate the air conditioner at least once amonth for one minute with the engineidling. This circulates the refrigerant and oiland helps protect the internal components.

EXAMPLE

WARNINGDo not use “antifreeze” solution inthe windshield washer reservoir. Thiscan severely impair visibility whensprayed on the windshield, and canalso damage your vehicle’s paint.

NOTICEDamage may result if the washermotor is operated with no fluid in thewasher tank.

169

Page 181: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

EMERGENCY SERVICE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

170

EMERGENCY SERVICE Tire Changing Tool ............................................................. 8-1Jacking Instructions ........................................................... 8-1Changing Wheels ................................................................ 8-3Jump Starting Instructions ................................................ 8-4Towing .................................................................................. 8-5If the Starter Does Not Operate .......................................... 8-6If the Engine is Flooded ...................................................... 8-6If the Engine Overheats ...................................................... 8-6

Page 182: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

8-1

EMERGENCY SERVICE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Tire Changing Tool

76MH1004

The jack, wheel wrench and jack handleare stowed in the luggage compartment.

76MH0A129

To remove the spare tire, turn its bolt (1)counterclockwise and remove it.

Jacking Instructions

52KM119

1) Place the vehicle on level, hard ground.2) Set the parking brake firmly and shift

into “R” (Reverse).

3) Turn on the hazard warning flasher ifyour vehicle is near traffic.

4) Block the front and rear of the wheeldiagonally opposite of the wheel beinglifted.

5) Place the spare wheel near the wheelbeing lifted as shown in the illustrationin case that the jack slips.

54G253

EXAMPLE

(1)

WARNINGAfter using the tire changing tools, besure to stow them securely or theycan cause injury if an accidentoccurs.

CAUTIONThe jack should be used only tochange wheels. It is important to readthe jacking instructions in this sec-tion before attempting to use thejack.

WARNING• Be sure to shift into “R” (Reverse)

when you jack up the vehicle.• Never jack up the vehicle with the

transaxle in “N” (Neutral). Other-wise, unstable jack may cause anaccident.

EXAMPLE

171

Page 183: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

8-2

EMERGENCY SERVICE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

63J100

63J101

6) Position the jack vertically and raise thejack by turning the jack handle clock-wise until the jack head groove fits

around the jacking bar beneath thevehicle body. See illustrations.

7) Continue to raise the jack slowly andsmoothly until the tire clears theground. Do not raise the vehicle morethan necessary.

To Raise the Vehicle with a Garage Jack• Apply the garage jack to one of the

points indicated below.• Always support the raised vehicle with

jack stands (commercially available) atthe points indicated below

.

Front jacking point for garage jack (1)

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

WARNING• Use the jack only to change wheels

on level, hard ground.• Never jack up the vehicle on an

inclined surface.• Never raise the vehicle with the

jack in a location other than thespecified jacking point (shown inthe illustration) near the wheel tobe changed.

• Make sure that the jack is raised atleast 51 mm (2 inches) before itcontacts the flange. Use of the jackwhen it is within 51 mm (2 inches)of being fully collapsed may resultin failure of the jack.

• Never get under the vehicle when itis supported by the jack.

• Never run the engine when thevehicle is supported by the jackand never allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

(1)

EXAMPLE

172

Page 184: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

8-3

EMERGENCY SERVICE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Rear jacking point for garage jack (2)

76MH0A078

Application point for jack stand (3) or two-column lift

61MM0B103

NOTE:For more details, please contact an autho-rized MARUTI SUZUKI dealer.

Changing WheelsTo change a wheel, use the following pro-cedure:

1) Clear all passengers and luggage fromthe vehicle.

2) Remove the jack, tools and spare wheelfrom the vehicle.

3) Loosen, but do not remove the wheelnuts.

4) Jack up the vehicle.5) Remove the wheel nuts and wheel.6) Before installing the new wheel, clean

any mud or dirt off from the surface ofthe wheel and hub with a clean cloth.Clean the hub carefully; it may be hotfrom driving.

7) Install the new wheel and replace thewheel nuts with their cone shaped endfacing the wheel. Tighten each nutsnugly by hand until the wheel issecurely seated on the hub.

54G116

Tightening torque for wheel nut85 Nm (8.7 kg-m, 62.7 lb-ft)

8) Lower the jack and fully tighten the nutsin a crisscross fashion with a wrench asshown in the illustration.

(2) EXAMPLE

(3) (3)

EXAMPLE

NOTICENever apply a garage jack to theexhaust pipe, side under spoiler (ifequipped), engine undercover or reartorsion beam.

WARNINGUse genuine wheel nuts and tightenthem to the specified torque as soonas possible after changing wheels.Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts may comeloose or fall off, which can result inan accident. If you do not have atorque wrench, have the wheel nuttorque checked by an authorizedMARUTI SUZUKI dealer.

Loosen

Tighten

173

Page 185: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

8-4

EMERGENCY SERVICE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Full Wheel Cover (if equipped)

60G309

Insert a piece of cloth between the spokesof the wheel cover and try to pull the coveroutward (as shown in figure). Take out thedetached wheel cover from the wheel rim.For installation first match the slot at thewheel cover with the air filling nozzle of thewheel. Apply equal pressure at the circum-ference of the wheel cover to fix it in thewheel rim.

74LHT0860

When installing the cover, make sure that itis positioned so that it does not cover orfoul the air valve.

Jump Starting Instructions

When Jump Starting Your Vehicle, Use the Following Procedure:1) Use only a 12-volt battery to jump start

your vehicle. Position the good 12-voltbattery close to your vehicle so that thejump leads will reach both batteries.When using a battery installed onanother vehicle, DO NOT LET THEVEHICLES TOUCH. Set the parkingbrakes fully on both vehicles.

2) Turn off all vehicle accessories, exceptthose necessary for safety reasons (forexample, headlights or hazard lights).

54MN259

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

WARNING• Never attempt to jump start your

vehicle if the battery appears to befrozen. Batteries in this conditionmay explode or rupture if jumpstarting is attempted.

• When making jump lead connec-tions, be certain that your handsand the jump leads remain clearfrom pulleys, belts, or fans.

• Batteries produce flammablehydrogen gas. Keep flames andsparks away from the battery or anexplosion may occur. Never smokewhen working in the vicinity of thebattery.

• If the booster battery you use forjump starting is installed in anothervehicle, make sure the two vehiclesare not touching each other.

• If your battery discharges repeat-edly, for no apparent reason, haveyour vehicle inspected by anauthorized MARUTI SUZUKI dealer.

• To avoid harm to yourself or dam-age to your vehicle or battery, fol-low the jump starting instructionsbelow precisely and in order. If you are in doubt, call for qualifiedroad service.

NOTICEYour vehicle should not be started bypushing or towing. This startingmethod could result in permanentdamage to the catalytic converter.Use jump leads to start a vehicle witha weak or flat battery.

(2)

(1)

(3) 23

4

1

EXAMPLE

174

Page 186: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

8-5

EMERGENCY SERVICE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

3) Make jump lead connections as follows:

1. Connect one end of the first jumplead to the positive (+) terminal ofthe flat battery (1).

2. Connect the other end to the positive(+) terminal of the booster battery(2).

3. Connect one end of the second jumplead to the negative (–) terminal ofthe booster battery (2).

4. Make the final connection to anunpainted, heavy metal part (i.e.engine mount bracket (3)) of theengine of the vehicle with the flatbattery (1).

4) If the booster battery you are using isfitted to another vehicle, start the

engine of the vehicle with the boosterbattery. Run the engine at moderatespeed.

5) Start the engine of the vehicle with theflat battery.

6) Remove the jump leads in the exactreverse order in which you connectedthem.

TowingIf you need to have your vehicle towed,contact a professional service. Your dealercan provide you with detailed towinginstructions.

2-Wheel Drive (2WD) Manual Tran-saxle or Auto Gear ShiftManual transaxle vehicles or Auto GearShift vehicles may be towed using either ofthe following methods.

1) From the front, with the front wheelslifted and the rear wheels on theground. Before towing, make sure thatthe parking brake is released.

2) From the rear, with the rear wheelslifted and the front wheels on theground, provided the steering anddrivetrain are in operational condition.Before towing, make sure that transaxleis in neutral, the steering wheel is

unlocked (the ignition key should be inthe “ACC” position), and the steeringwheel is secured with a clampingdevice designed for towing service.

WARNINGNever connect the jump lead directlyto the negative (–) terminal of the dis-charged battery, or an explosion mayoccur.

CAUTIONConnect the jump lead to the enginemount bracket securely. If the jumplead disconnects from the enginemount bracket because of vibrationat the start of the engine, the jumplead could be caught in the drivebelts.

NOTICETo help avoid damage to your vehicleduring towing, proper equipment andtowing procedures must be used.

NOTICEAfter shifting the Auto Gear Shiftlever to the “N” position, alwayscheck the gear position indicator inthe instrument cluster shows the “N”position to make sure that thetransaxle is disengaged.If the transaxle cannot be put in neu-tral, turn the key from the “LOCK” tothe “ON” position, and move theAuto Gear Shift lever from “N” to “D”,“M” or “R”, then back to “N” again.Then turn the key from the “ON” tothe “LOCK” position.These procedures may help put thetransaxle in neutral. If the transaxlestill cannot be put in neutral, you can-not tow the vehicle without using atowing dolly.The steering column is not strongenough to with stand shocks trans-mitted from the front wheels duringtowing. Always unlock the steeringwheel before towing.

175

Page 187: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

8-6

EMERGENCY SERVICE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

If the Starter Does Not Operate1) Try turning the ignition switch to the

“START” position with the headlightsturned on to determine the battery con-dition. If the headlights go excessivelydim or go off, it usually means thateither the battery is flat or the batteryterminal contact is poor. Recharge thebattery or correct battery terminal con-tact as necessary.

2) If the headlights remain bright, checkthe fuses. If the reason for failure of thestarter is not obvious, there may be amajor electrical problem. Have the vehi-cle inspected by your authorized MAR-UTI SUZUKI dealer.

If the Engine is FloodedIf the engine is flooded with petrol, it maybe hard to start. If this happens, press theaccelerator pedal all the way to the floorand hold it there while cranking the engine. • For petrol engine model, do not operate

the starter motor for more than 12 sec-onds.

• For diesel engine model, do not operatethe starter motor for more than 30 sec-onds.

If the Engine OverheatsThe engine could overheat temporarilyunder severe driving conditions. If the highengine coolant temperature warning lightcomes on as overheating during driving:1) Turn off the air conditioner, if equipped.2) Take the vehicle to a safe place and

park.3) Let the engine run at the normal idle

speed for a few minutes until the highengine coolant temperature warninglight goes off.

If the high engine coolant temperaturewarning light does not go off:1) Turn off the engine and check that the

water pump belt and pulleys are notdamaged or slipping. If any abnormalityis found, correct it.

2) Check the coolant level in the reservoir.If it is found to be lower than the “LOW”line, look for leaks at the radiator, waterpump, and radiator and heater hoses. Ifyou locate any leaks that may havecaused the overheating, do not run theengine until these problems have beencorrected.

3) If you do not find a leak, carefully addcoolant to the reservoir and then theradiator, if necessary. (Refer to “EngineCoolant” in the “INSPECTION ANDMAINTENANCE” section.)

NOTE:If your engine overheats and you areunsure what to do, contact your MARUTISUZUKI dealer.

WARNINGIf you see or hear escaping steam,stop the vehicle in a safe place andimmediately turn off the engine to letit cool. Do not open the hood whensteam is present. When the steamcan no longer be seen or heard, openthe hood to see if the coolant is stillboiling. If it is, you must wait until itstops boiling before you proceed.

176

Page 188: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

8-7

EMERGENCY SERVICE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

65D614

Warning Triangle

MHO-07-001

In case of vehicle break-down or duringemergency stopping, where, your vehiclecould become a potential traffic hazard,keep the warning triangle, provided withyour vehicle, on the road free from anyobstacles behind your vehicle so as towarn the approaching traffic, at an approxi-mate distance of 50-100 m. The reflectingside of the triangle should face the on com-ing traffic. Please activate the hazardwarning lamps before alighting the vehicleto keep the warning triangle.

MHO-07-014

• Remove the warning triangle carefullyfrom the cover as shown by arrow 1.

• Open both the reflector arms as shownby arrow and lock the arms with eachother with the clip provided in the rightarm. Open the bottom stand in counterclock-wise direction as shown by arrow3. Position the warning triangle behindthe vehicle on a plain surface.

• Reverse the removal procedure for keep-ing inside the cover.

MHO-07-014

WARNING• It is hazardous to remove the radia-

tor cap (or degassing tank cap for adiesel engine) when the water tem-perature is high, because scaldingfluid and steam may be blown outunder pressure. The cap shouldonly be taken off when the coolanttemperature has lowered.

• To help prevent personal injury,keep hands, tools and clothingaway from the engine cooling fanand air-conditioner fan (ifequipped). These electric fans canautomatically turn on without warn-ing.

EXAMPLE

177

Page 189: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

APPEARANCE CARE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

178

APPEARANCE CARE Corrosion Prevention ......................................................... 9-1Vehicle Cleaning ................................................................. 9-2

Page 190: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

9-1

APPEARANCE CARE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

APPEARANCE CARECorrosion PreventionIt is important to take good care of yourvehicle to protect it from corrosion. Listedbelow are instructions for how to maintainyour vehicle to prevent corrosion. Pleaseread and follow these instructions carefully.

Important Information About CorrosionCommon causes of corrosion1) Accumulation of road salt, dirt, mois-

ture, or chemicals in hard-to-reachareas of the vehicle underbody orframe.

2) Chipping, scratches and any damage totreated or painted metal surfacesresulting from minor accidents or abra-sion by stones and gravel.

Environmental conditions which accel-erate corrosion1) Road salt, dust control chemicals, sea

air or industrial pollution will all acceler-ate the corrosion of metal.

2) High humidity will increase the rate ofcorrosion particularly when the tem-perature range is just above the freez-ing point.

3) Moisture in certain areas of a vehiclefor an extended period of time may pro-mote corrosion even though other bodysections may be completely dry.

4) High temperatures will cause an accel-erated rate of corrosion to parts of thevehicle which are not well ventilated topermit quick drying.

This information illustrates the necessity ofkeeping your vehicle (particularly theunderbody) as clean and dry as possible. Itis equally important to repair any damageto the paint or protective coatings as soonas possible.

How to Help Prevent CorrosionWash your vehicle frequentlyThe best way to preserve the finish on yourvehicle and to help avoid corrosion is tokeep it clean with frequent washing.Wash your vehicle at least once during thewinter and once immediately after the win-ter. Keep your vehicle, particularly theunderside, as clean and dry as possible.If you frequently drive on salted roads, yourvehicle should be washed at least once amonth during the winter. If you live near theocean, your vehicle should be washed atleast once a month throughout the year.

For washing instructions, refer to the “Vehi-cle Cleaning” section.

Remove foreign material depositsForeign material such as salts, chemicals,road oil or tar, tree sap, bird droppings andindustrial fall-out may damage the finish ofyour vehicle if it is left on painted surfaces.Remove these types of deposits as quicklyas possible. If these deposits are difficult towash off, an additional cleaner may berequired. Be sure that any cleaner you use

is not harmful to painted surfaces and isspecifically intended for your purposes. Fol-low the manufacturer’s directions whenusing these special cleaners.

Repair finish damageCarefully examine your vehicle for damageto the painted surfaces. Should you findany chips or scratches in the paint, touchthem up immediately to prevent corrosionfrom starting. If the chips or scratches havegone through to the bare metal, have aqualified body shop make the repair.

Keep passenger and luggage compart-ments cleanMoisture, dirt or mud can accumulate underthe floor mats and may cause corrosion.Occasionally, check under these mats toensure that this area is clean and dry. Morefrequent checks are necessary if the vehicleis used off road or in wet weather.Certain cargos such as chemicals, fertiliz-ers, cleaners, salts, etc. are extremely cor-rosive by nature. These products should betransported in sealed containers. If a spill orleak does occur, clean and dry the areaimmediately.

Store your vehicle in a dry, well-venti-lated areaDo not park your vehicle in a damp, poorlyventilated area. If you often wash yourvehicle in the garage or if you frequentlydrive it in when wet, your garage may bedamp. The high humidity in the garagemay cause or accelerate corrosion. A wetvehicle may corrode even in a heatedgarage if the ventilation is poor.

179

Page 191: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

9-2

APPEARANCE CARE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Vehicle Cleaning

76G044S

Cleaning the InteriorVinyl upholsteryPrepare a solution of soap or mild deter-gent mixed with warm water. Apply thesolution to the vinyl with a sponge or softcloth and let it soak for a few minutes toloosen dirt.Rub the surface with a clean, damp cloth toremove dirt and the soap solution. If somedirt still remains on the surface, repeat thisprocedure.

Fabric upholsteryRemove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.Using a mild soap solution, rub stainedareas with a clean damp cloth. To removesoap, rub the areas again with a clothdampened with water. Repeat this until thestain is removed, or use a commercial fab-ric cleaner for tougher stains. If you use afabric cleaner, carefully follow the manu-facturer’s instructions and precautions.

Seat beltsClean seat belts with a mild soap andwater. Do not use bleach or dye on thebelts. They may weaken the fabric in thebelts.

Vinyl floor matsOrdinary dirt can be removed from vinylwith water or mild soap. Use a brush tohelp loosen dirt. After the dirt is loosened,rinse the mat thoroughly with water anddry it in the shade.

CarpetsRemove dirt and soil as much as possiblewith a vacuum cleaner. Using a mild soapsolution, rub stained areas with a cleandamp cloth. To remove soap, rub the areasagain with a cloth dampened with water.Repeat this until the stain is removed, oruse a commercial carpet cleaner fortougher stains. If you use a carpet cleaner,carefully follow the manufacturer’s instruc-tions and precautions.

Instrument panel and consoleRemove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.Gently wipe dirt off with a tightly squeezeddamp clean cloth. Repeat this until the dirtis removed.

Cleaning the Exterior

WARNINGDo not apply additional undercoatingor rust preventive coating on oraround exhaust system componentssuch as the catalytic converter,exhaust pipes, etc. A fire could bestarted if the undercoating substancebecomes overheated.

WARNINGWhen cleaning the interior or exteriorof the vehicle, NEVER USE flammablesolvents such as lacquer thinners,petrol, benzene or cleaning materialssuch as bleaches or strong householddetergents. The materials could causepersonal injury or damage to the vehi-cle.

NOTICEDo not use chemical products thatcontain silicon to wipe electricalcomponents such as the air condi-tioning system, audio, navigationsystem, or other switches. These willcause damage to the components.

NOTICEIt is important that your vehicle bekept clean and free from dirt. Failureto keep your vehicle clean may resultin fading of the paint or corrosion tovarious parts of the vehicle body.

180

Page 192: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

9-3

APPEARANCE CARE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Caring for Aluminum Wheels

NOTE:• Do not use an acidic or alkaline deter-

gent to wash aluminum wheels. Thesetypes of detergent will cause permanentspots, discoloration and cracks on fin-ished surfaces.

• Do not use a bristle brush and soap con-taining an abrasive material. These willdamage finished surfaces.

Washing

60B212S

When washing the vehicle, park it wheredirect sunlight does not fall on it and followthe instructions below:1) Flush the underside of body and wheel

housings with pressurized water toremove mud and debris. Use plenty ofwater.

2) Rinse the body to loosen the dirt.Remove dirt and mud from the body

exterior with running water. You mayuse a soft sponge or brush. Do not usehard materials which can scratch thepaint or plastic. Remember that theheadlight covers or lenses are made ofplastic in many cases.

3) Wash the entire exterior with a milddetergent or car wash soap using asponge or soft cloth. The sponge orcloth should be frequently soaked in thesoap solution.

4) Once the dirt has been completelyremoved, rinse off the detergent withrunning water.

5) After rinsing, wipe off the vehicle bodywith a wet chamois or cloth and allow itto dry in the shade.

6) Check carefully for damage to paintedsurfaces. If there is any damage,“touch-up” the damage following theprocedure below:

WARNING• Never attempt to wash and wax

your vehicle with the engine run-ning.

• When cleaning the underside of thebody and fender, where there maybe sharp-edged parts, you shouldwear gloves and a long-sleevedshirt to protect your hands andarms from being cut.

• After washing your vehicle, care-fully test the brakes before drivingto make sure they have maintainedtheir normal effectiveness.

NOTICEWhen washing the vehicle:• Avoid directing steam or hot water

of more than 80°C (176°F) on plas-tic parts.

• To avoid damaging engine compo-nents, do not use pressurizedwater in the engine compartment.

NOTICETo avoid damage to the paint or plas-tic surface, do not wipe the dirt offwithout ample water. Be sure to fol-low above procedure.

NOTICEWhen using a commercial car washproduct, observe the cautions speci-fied by the manufacturer. Never usestrong household detergents orsoaps.

181

Page 193: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

9-4

APPEARANCE CARE

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

1. Clean all damaged spots and allowthem to dry.

2. Stir the paint and “touch-up” thedamaged spots lightly using a smallbrush.

3. Allow the paint to dry completely.

Waxing

60B211S

After washing the vehicle, waxing and pol-ishing are recommended to further protectand beautify the paint.

• Only use waxes and polishes of goodquality.

• When using waxes and polishes,observe the precautions specified by themanufacturers.

NOTICEIf you use an automatic car wash,make sure that your vehicle’s bodyparts, such as spoilers, cannot bedamaged. If you are in doubt, consultthe car wash operator for advice.

182

Page 194: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

10-1

GENERAL INFORMATION

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

GENERAL INFORMATIONVehicle IdentificationChassis Serial Number

68KH096

The chassis and/or engine serial numbersare used to register the vehicle. They arealso used to assist your dealer when order-ing or referring to special service informa-tion. Whenever you have occasion toconsult your MARUTI SUZUKI dealer,remember to identify your vehicle with thisnumber. Should you find the number diffi-cult to read, you will also find it on the iden-tification plate.

Engine Serial Number

54G082

The engine serial number is stamped onthe cylinder block as shown in the illustra-tion.

EXAMPLE

183

Page 195: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

10-2

GENERAL INFORMATION

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

Radio frequency identification (RFID) tag (if equipped)As per Ministry of Road Transport andHighways, the Radio frequency identifica-tion (RFID) tag (1) is mandatory for eachvehicle for the purpose of electronic tollcollection or any other purpose as may bedefined by the Government of India.

In case of any damage to RFID tag orreplacement of front windscreen, pleasecontact your nearest MARUTI SUZUKIAuthorized workshop.

76MH1001

As seen from inside of the vehicle

76MH1002

NOTE:The picture shown is for indicative purposeonly. Internal structure of actual devicemounted on vehicle may be different.

As seen from outside of the vehicle

76MH1003

NOTE:The picture shown is for indicative purposeonly. Internal structure of actual devicemounted on vehicle may be different.

NOTE:• RFID tag needs to be registered by gov-

ernment authorized agency (if applica-ble).

• Any attempt to remove the tag from thewindscreen will result in permanent dam-age to the tag.

• Use of chemical cleaners to clean thewindscreen area where the tag ismounted can damage the tag.

• Use of any sharp objects on the tag candamage the tag.

(1)

184

Page 196: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

11-1

SPECIFICATIONS

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

SPECIFICATIONSNOTE:Specifications are subject to change with-out notice.

M/T: Manual transaxle Petrol: Petrol engine modelDiesel: Diesel engine model

ITEM: Dimensions UNIT: mm

Overall length 3600

Overall width 1600

Overall height 1560

Wheelbase 2425

Track Front 1420

Rear 1410

Ground clearance 165

ITEM: Mass (weight) UNIT: kg PETROL ENGINE MODEL DIESEL ENGINE MODEL

Curb mass (weight) M/T 810 - 830 880 - 900

Auto Gear Shift 815 - 830 –

Gross vehicle mass (weight) rating 1250 1310

Permissible maximum Axle Weight Front 680 720

Rear 640 640

185

Page 197: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

11-2

SPECIFICATIONS

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

ITEM: Engine

Type K10B (DOHC) E08A

Number of cylinders 3 2

Bore 73.0 mm 77.0 mm

Stroke 79.5 mm 85.1 mm

Piston displacement 998 cm3 793 cm3

Compression ratio 11.0 ± 0.4: 1 15.1 ± 0.4: 1

ITEM: Electrical

Standard spark plug Petrol NGK KR6A-10

Battery Petrol 12V 34B19L

Diesel 12V 55B24L

Fuses See “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” section.

186

Page 198: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

11-3

SPECIFICATIONS

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

ITEM: Lights WATTAGE BULB No.

Headlight 12V 60/55W H4

Front fog light (if equipped) 12V 35W H8

Position light 12V 5W W5W

Turn signal light Front 12V 21W PY21W

Rear 12V 21W PY21W

Side turn signal light 12V 5W WY5W

LED –

Brake/tail light 12V 21/5W P21/5W

High mount stop light 12V 5W W5W

Reversing light 12V 21W P21W

License plate light 12V 5W W5W

Interior light 12V 10W –

187

Page 199: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

11-4

SPECIFICATIONS

76MH1-74E

76MH1-74E

*1: When tire replacement is necessary and if the specified load index and speed rated tire is not available, then use a tire of higherload index and speed rating.

*2: The spare wheel provided with alloy wheel variant is steel wheel rim, hence follow 4 tire rotation only. (Refer: under section“Inspection and maintenance”)

ITEM: Wheels and Tires

Tire size 155/80R13 79S*1, 165/70R14 81S*1*2

Rim size 13 × 4 1/2J (For R13 tire)14 × 5J (For R14 tire)

Tire pressures For the specified tire pressure, see the Tire Information Label located onthe driver’s door lock pillar.

ITEM: Recommended Fuel/Lubricants and Capacities (approx.)

Fuel 35 L

Engine oilPetrol 2.8 L (replacement with oil filter)

Diesel 3.4 L (replacement with oil filter)

Coolant (including reservoir tank)Petrol 3.3 L

Diesel 3.6 L

Manual transaxle oilPetrol 1.45 L

Diesel 2.0 L

188

Page 200: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

This Owner’s manual & service booklet applies to CELERIO modelsproduced by MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED.

c COPYRIGHT MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED 2015

Note : The illustrated model is one of the CELERIO seriesAccessories shown in the picture are not part of standard equipment

Prepared by

MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED

Service DivisionMarch, 2015

Part No. 99011M76M02-74EPrinted in India

#For round-the-clock on-road assistance, call Maruti On-road Service at 1800 102 1800#No STD code to be prefixed.

This Owner’s manual & service booklet applies to CELERIO modelsproduced by MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED.

c COPYRIGHT MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED 2015

Note : The illustrated model is one of the CELERIO seriesAccessories shown in the picture are not part of standard equipment

Prepared by

MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED

Service DivisionMarch, 2015

Part No. 99011M76M03-74EPrinted in India

#For round-the-clock on-road assistance, call Maruti On-road Service at 1800 102 1800#No STD code to be prefixed.

Page 201: OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLET...Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results. For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized

99011M76M

02-74E

CO

DE

02/0

3/2

015

/500

0

Service Division

MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITEDPalam Gurgaon Road, Gurgaon - 122 015 (Haryana)

www.marutisuzuki.com

PEACE OF MIND1800 102 1800

India's No. 1 Car Exchange Programme

OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLETKeep With Vehicle At All Times.Contains Important InformationOn Safety, Operation & Maintenance.

ENG.Part No. 99011M76M02-74EMarch, 2015

ORIH ST E

U D

A

S EE CR IV

99011M76M

03-74E

CO

DE

02

/03

/20

15

/50

00

Service Division

MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITEDPalam Gurgaon Road, Gurgaon - 122 015 (Haryana)

www.marutisuzuki.com

PEACE OF MIND1800 102 1800

India's No. 1 Car Exchange Programme

OWNER'S MANUAL & SERVICE BOOKLETKeep With Vehicle At All Times.Contains Important InformationOn Safety, Operation & Maintenance.

ENG.Part No. 99011M76M03-74EMarch, 2015

ORIH ST E

U D

A

S EE CR IV